summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs')
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunDoc29
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunExamples81
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunSlideDoc25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/manifest.txt71
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.pdfbin0 -> 37543 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.tex66
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.pdfbin0 -> 79391 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.tex97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.pdfbin0 -> 134820 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.tex175
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styleexample.tex50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styletest.tex134
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.bib142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.pdfbin0 -> 540815 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.tex2807
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.pdfbin0 -> 553683 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.tex2889
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.pdfbin0 -> 99791 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.tex2635
19 files changed, 9201 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunDoc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunDoc
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..b0a0ec257aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunDoc
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+# To generate style examples, do
+# (after extracting powerdot-styleexample.tex):
+# Do this for all available styles (replace `default' by any
+# other style name) to generate .001 and .002 files which
+# will be included by the documentation.
+
+latex powerdot.tex
+./RunExamples
+latex powerdot.tex
+latex powerdot.tex
+bibtex powerdot
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
+makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
+latex powerdot.tex
+latex powerdot.tex
+dvips powerdot.dvi
+ps2pdf powerdot.ps
+latex powerdotDE.tex
+latex powerdotDE.tex
+
+rm *.aux *.log *.i?? *.g?? *.toc *.dvi *.blg *.ps *.bm *.bbl
+rm powerdot-styleexample-*
+
+
+# If you also want to generate the source code documentation,
+# remove \OnlyDescription from the preamble of powerdot.dtx
+# prior to compiling the source.
+#
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunExamples b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunExamples
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..d386d757264
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunExamples
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+# To generate style examples, do
+# (after extracting powerdot-styleexample.tex):
+# Do this for all available styles (replace `default' by any
+# other style name) to generate .001 and .002 files which
+# will be included by the documentation.
+
+ latex "\def\style{default}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{default}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-default.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{ciment}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{ciment}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-ciment.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{aggie}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{aggie}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-aggie.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{bframe}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{bframe}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-bframe.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{elcolors}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{elcolors}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-elcolors.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{fyma}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{fyma}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-fyma.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{horatio}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{horatio}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-horatio.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{husky}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{husky}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-husky.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{ikeda}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{ikeda}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-ikeda.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{jefka}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{jefka}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-jefka.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{klope}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{klope}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-klope.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{paintings}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{paintings}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-paintings.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{pazik}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{pazik}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-pazik.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{sailor}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{sailor}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-sailor.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{simple}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{simple}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-simple.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{tycja}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{tycja}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-tycja.ps
+#
+ latex "\def\style{upen}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ latex "\def\style{upen}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
+ dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-upen.ps
+
+rm *.aux *.log *.i?? *.g?? *.toc *.dvi *.blg *.bm *.bbl
+
+# If you also want to generate the source code documentation,
+# remove \OnlyDescription from the preamble of powerdot.dtx
+# prior to compiling the source.
+#
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunSlideDoc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunSlideDoc
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..c7bfd8db135
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/RunSlideDoc
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+# To generate style examples, do
+# (after extracting powerdot-styleexample.tex):
+# Do this for all available styles (replace `default' by any
+# other style name) to generate .001 and .002 files which
+# will be included by the documentation.
+
+latex powerdotSlide.tex
+latex powerdotSlide.tex
+#bibtex powerdot
+#makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
+#makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
+#latex powerdot.tex
+#latex powerdot.tex
+dvips powerdotSlide.dvi
+ps2pdf powerdotSlide.ps
+
+rm *.aux *.log *.i?? *.g?? *.toc *.dvi *.blg *.ps *.bm *.bbl
+rm powerdot-styleexample-*
+
+
+# If you also want to generate the source code documentation,
+# remove \OnlyDescription from the preamble of powerdot.dtx
+# prior to compiling the source.
+#
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/manifest.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1e08f6602c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/manifest.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+powerdot manifest
+=================
+
+
+This work consists of the file:
+
+ powerdot.cls
+ powerdot-styletest.tex
+ powerdot-styleexample.tex
+ powerdot-example1.tex
+ powerdot-example2.tex
+ powerdot-example3.tex
+ powerdot-default.sty
+ powerdot-tycja.sty
+ powerdot-ikeda.sty
+ powerdot-fyma.sty
+ powerdot-simple.sty
+ powerdot-ciment.sty
+ powerdot-elcolors.sty
+ powerdot-aggie.sty
+ powerdot-husky.sty
+ powerdot-sailor.sty
+ powerdot-upen.sty
+ powerdot-bframe.sty
+ powerdot-horatio.sty
+ powerdot-paintings.sty
+ powerdot-klope.sty
+ powerdot-jefka.sty
+ powerdot-pazik.sty
+
+
+
+The following overview shows which files constitute the
+powerdot bundle and must be distributed as a whole. It
+also shows the supposed location of these files in a
+TDS-compliant TeX-tree:
+
+CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot/distrib: official location
+ |
+ |- README : should not be installed
+ |- docs
+ | |- lyx : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ | | |- powerdot.layout : /doc/latex/powerdot/lyx
+ | | |- powerdot-example.lyx : /doc/latex/powerdot/lyx
+ | | `- powerdot-example.tex : /doc/latex/powerdot/lyx
+ | |
+ | |- manifest.txt : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ | |- powerdot.pdf : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ | |- powerdot-example1.tex : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ | |- powerdot-example2.tex : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ | `- powerdot-example3.tex : /doc/latex/powerdot
+ |
+ |- powerdot.cls : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-default.ps : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-default.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-ikeda.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-tycja.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-fyma.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-simple.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-ciment.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-elcolors.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-aggie.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-husky.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-sailor.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-upen.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-bframe.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-horatio.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-paintings.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-klope.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ |- powerdot-jefka.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
+ `- powerdot-pazik.sty : /tex/latex/powerdot
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2049764d1ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..40c97bcc5e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot-example1.tex',
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+\documentclass{powerdot}
+
+\title{powerdot example 1}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 1}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item This is the first slide\pause
+ \item There is nothing special about it.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section{First section}
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 2}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<1-> Here
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<2-> we
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3-> demonstrate
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<4-> the itemize environment
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 3}
+ \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
+ \item<1> Here
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item<2> we
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item<3> demonstrate
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item<4> the enumerate environment
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{slide}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot-example1.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a3b1fd5ab6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d8403be397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot-example2.tex',
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+\documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ style=ikeda,
+ paper=screen,
+%% Try me!
+%% orient=portrait,
+%% mode=handout,
+%% display=slidesnotes,
+ blackslide,
+ nopagebreaks,
+ fleqn
+]{powerdot}
+
+\title{powerdot example 2}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison}
+
+\pdsetup{
+ lf=Example 2,
+ cf=\today,
+ rf=for powerdot,
+ trans=Wipe,
+ theslide=slide~\arabic{slide},
+ list={itemsep=6pt}
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 1}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item This is a bigger example\pause
+ \item demonstrating more of the possibilities of powerdot.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section{This section has a slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 2}
+ Here is the binomium formula.\pause
+ \begin{equation}\label{binomium}
+ (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
+ \end{equation}\pause
+ We will prove formula (\ref{binomium}) on the blackboard.\\
+ Click the title of this slide to switch to the black slide.
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{note}{Note to slide 2}
+ Here we could type the proof that
+ we want to copy to the blackboard.
+\end{note}
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 3}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item This happens\dots\pause
+ \item when you change\dots\pause
+ \item the type of itemize.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section[template=wideslide,tocsection=hidden]{A hidden wide section}
+
+\begin{slide}{Slide 4}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item We only treat this material\dots\pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item if we have some time left.\pause
+ \item But don't hesitate\dots\pause
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item to read it yourself.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{wideslide}{Slide 5}
+ This wide slide can contain more material
+ as it is wider and does not have a table
+ of contents.
+\end{wideslide}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot-example2.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ecf49830cd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fed59471afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-example3.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot-example3.tex',
+
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+\documentclass[style=klope,%clock,
+ hlsections]{powerdot}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{pst-node}
+\usepackage{listings}
+
+\lstnewenvironment{example}[1][]{%
+ \lstset{basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,columns=flexible,%
+ frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},%
+ xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep%,gobble=1
+ }\lstset{#1}}{}
+\lstnewenvironment{examplesmall}[1][]{%
+ \lstset{basicstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,columns=flexible,%
+ frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},%
+ xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep%,gobble=2
+ }\lstset{#1}}{}
+
+\title{powerdot example 3 --- verbatim and random dots}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison}
+
+\pdsetup{
+ lf=Example 3,
+ cf=\today,
+ rf=for powerdot,
+ palette=Spring,
+ randomdots,
+ dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.25pt},
+ dmindots=5,dmaxdots=5,
+ dminsize=600pt,dmaxsize=700pt,
+ dbright=50,
+ logohook=c,
+ logopos={.505\slidewidth,.08\slideheight},
+ logocmd={\includegraphics[scale=.05]{powerdot-default.ps}}
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{slide}{Overview}
+ \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
+ \item This file demonstrates \pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item some uses of \texttt{verbatim} \pause
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item and \pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item some uses of randomdots
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section{section}
+
+\begin{slide}[palette=PastelFlower,method=direct,
+ dprop={dotstyle=*},
+ dminsize=5pt,dmaxsize=10pt,
+ dmindots=5,dmaxdots=10]{Name that quote}
+ G\"odel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid \pause
+
+ \verb|G\"odel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid| \pause
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ The two of you may find it amusing to listen
+ to such totally meaningless cacophony, but I assure you it is not at
+ all pleasant for a sensitive composer to be subjected to such
+ excruciating, empty dissonances and meaningless rhythms. Achilles,
+ I thought you had a good feeling for music. Could it be that your
+ previous pieces had merit merely by coincidence?
+ \end{quote}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}[palette=BlueWater,
+ dprop={dotstyle=osquare,linewidth=.2pt},
+ dminsize=4pt,dmaxsize=10pt,
+ dmindots=5,dmaxdots=10]{Itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<1> here
+ \item<2> we
+ \item<3> go
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}[toc=What day is it?,bm=What day is it?,method=direct,
+ dprop={dotstyle=*},dminsize=4pt,dmaxsize=20pt,
+ dmindots=30,dmaxdots=30]{What day is it?\hfill A test}
+\begin{example}
+ <?php
+ if ($day == "monday")
+ {
+ $callInSick = true;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ $callInSick = false;
+ }
+ ?>
+\end{example}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section[slide=false]{The \texttt{direct} and \texttt{file} methods}
+
+\begin{slide}[method=direct,randomdots=false]{Quadratic}
+ With \verb|method=direct|, there are no overlays.\pause
+
+ But you can still use display verbatim text.
+
+ \[
+ x \pause = \pause \frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^2 - 4ac}}{2a} \pause
+ \]
+
+ Attempting \pause a \pause pause\ldots\pause
+
+ \verb|Plot[3x,{x,0,10}]|
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}[method=file,randomdots=false]{Quadratic}
+ With \verb|method=file|, \pause you can display verbatim text and have overlays.\pause
+
+ \[
+ x \pause = \pause \frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^2 - 4ac}}{2a} \pause
+ \]
+
+ Attempting \pause a \pause pause\ldots\pause
+
+ \verb|Plot[3x,{x,0,10}]|
+\end{slide}
+
+\section[slide=false]{Nodes}
+
+\begin{slide}[method=file,randomdots=false]{Taylor}
+\begin{lstlisting}[escapechar=|,mathescape]
+ e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|x^2/2! + |\color{red}{\ldots}| |\pause|
+ e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|$\rnode{A}{\frac{x^2}{2!}}$ + |\color{red}{\ldots}|
+\end{lstlisting}
+\pause\vspace{.1in}
+Notice, \rnode{B}{this} fraction is in \verb|mathmode|.
+\onslide*{11-}{\ncarc[linecolor=blue,arcangle=-5]{->}{B}{A}}\pause \vspace{.1in}
+
+The above (as its own slide) was coded as follows:
+\begin{examplesmall}[escapechar=@]
+ \begin{slide}[method=file]{Taylor}
+ \begin{lstlisting}[escapechar=|,mathescape]
+ e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|x^2/2! + |\color{red}{\ldots}| |\pause|
+ e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|$\rnode{A}{\frac{x^2}{2!}}$ + |\color{red}{\ldots}|
+ \end{lstlisting}
+
+ \pause\vspace{.1in}
+
+ Notice, \rnode{B}{this} fraction is in \verb|mathmode|.
+ \onslide*{11-}{\ncarc[linecolor=blue,arcangle=-5]{->}{B}{A}}\pause \vspace{.1in}
+ @\char`\\@end{slide}
+\end{examplesmall}
+\end{slide}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot-example3.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styleexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styleexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4b83a312fa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styleexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot-styleexample.tex',
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%%
+%%
+\documentclass[paper=letterpaper,style=\style]{powerdot}
+\title{Example of the \style\ style}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}
+\pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{tocpos}{}
+\pdsetup{lf=left footer,rf=right footer}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\begin{slide}{Example slide}
+ Here is the binomium formula.
+ \begin{equation}\label{binomium}
+ (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
+ \end{equation}
+ We will prove formula (\ref{binomium}) on the blackboard.\\
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Here
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item is
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item a
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item list
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item with
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item seven
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item items.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot-styleexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styletest.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styletest.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8473c415572
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot-styletest.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot-styletest.tex',
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%%
+%% For testing, enter your style below.
+%% Switch on only one paper/orient option at a time.
+\documentclass[
+ style=your style,
+ paper=screen,
+%% paper=a4paper,
+%% paper=letterpaper,
+ orient=landscape,
+%% orient=portrait,
+ size=11pt,
+%% hlsections,
+ clock
+]{powerdot}
+
+\pdsetup{
+ lf=left footer,
+ cf=center footer,
+ rf=right footer,
+ randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle}
+}
+
+%% For testing text height.
+\makeatletter
+\def\textheightrule{%
+ \raisebox\baselineskip{\rule{1cm}\pd@@textheight}%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\title{This is a test file to test new styles with --
+this title is very long on purpose.\thanks{Adjust textheight
+to position this footnote.}}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}
+\date{August 16, 2005}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{slide}{Test normal slide}
+ Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus
+ elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
+ dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
+ id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
+ habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac
+ turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.
+
+ Notice the color of the equation number!
+ \begin{equation}
+ (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
+ \end{equation}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{Test itemize}
+ Some text.\pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item level 1\pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item level 2\pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item level 3\pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item level 4
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+ Some text.\footnote{Adjust textheight
+ to position this footnote.}
+\end{slide}
+
+\section{Normal section}
+
+\begin{slide}{Test enumerate and inactive color}
+ Some text.\pause
+ \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
+ \item level 1\pause
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item level 2\pause
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item level 3\pause
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item level 4
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ Some text.
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{The rule has height \texttt{textheight}}
+ \textheightrule
+\end{slide}
+
+\section[template=wideslide]{Wide slide section}
+
+\begin{wideslide}{Test wideslide}
+ Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus
+ elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
+ dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
+ id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
+ habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac
+ turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus
+ sem.\footnote{Adjust textheight to position this footnote.}
+
+ Notice the color of the equation number!
+ \begin{equation}
+ (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
+ \end{equation}
+\end{wideslide}
+
+\begin{wideslide}{The rule has height \texttt{textheight}}
+ \textheightrule
+\end{wideslide}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot-styletest.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c32474f8672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `powerdot.bib',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% powerdot.dtx (with options: `bib')
+%%
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2010 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% Version 1.4a prepared by Herbert Voss
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Hendri Adriaens.
+%%
+%% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+%%
+@book{companion,
+ author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens},
+ title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion},
+ edition = 2,
+ note = {With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley},
+ series = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
+ address = {Boston, Massachusetts},
+ year = 2004,
+ pagenums = {1120},
+ bibliography = {yes},
+ index = {yes},
+ isbn = {0-201-36299-6}
+}
+
+@MISC{PSTricks,
+ author = {{Timothy Van} {Zandt et al.}},
+ title = {\pf{PSTricks} package, v1.07, 2005/05/06},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/graphics/pstricks}}
+}
+
+@MISC{PSTricksWeb,
+ author = {Herbert Vo\ss},
+ title = {\pf{PSTricks} website},
+ howpublished = {\url{http://tug.org/pstricks/}}
+}
+
+@MISC{xkeyval,
+ author = {Hendri Adriaens},
+ title = {\pf{xkeyval} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xkeyval}}
+}
+
+@MISC{extsizes,
+ author = {James Kilfiger and Wolfgang May},
+ title = {\pf{extsizes} bundle},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/extsizes}}
+}
+
+@MISC{prosper,
+ author = {Fr\'ed\'eric Goualard and Peter M\o ller Neergaard},
+ title = {\pf{prosper} class},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/prosper}}
+}
+
+@MISC{HA-prosper,
+ author = {Hendri Adriaens},
+ title = {\pf{HA-prosper} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/HA-prosper}}
+}
+
+@MISC{enumitem,
+ author = {Javier Bezos},
+ title = {\pf{enumitem} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem}}
+}
+
+@MISC{hyperref,
+ author = {Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Overdiek},
+ title = {\pf{hyperref} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref}}
+}
+
+@MISC{natbib,
+ author = {Patrick W. Daly},
+ title = {\pf{natbib} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/natbib}}
+}
+
+@MISC{geometry,
+ author = {Hideo Umeki},
+ title = {\pf{geometry} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/geometry}}
+}
+
+@MISC{xcolor,
+ author = {Uwe Kern},
+ title = {\pf{xcolor} package},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xcolor}}
+}
+
+@MISC{graphics,
+ author = {David Carlisle},
+ title = {\pf{graphics} bundle},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/required/graphics}}
+}
+
+@MISC{random,
+ author = {Donald Arseneau},
+ title = {\texttt{random.tex}},
+ howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/generic/misc}}
+}
+
+@MISC{CTAN,
+ author = {CTAN crew},
+ title = {{The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network}},
+ howpublished = {\url{http://www.ctan.org}}
+}
+
+@MISC{LyXWeb,
+ author = {{\LyX\ crew}},
+ title = {{\LyX\ website}},
+ howpublished = {\url{http://www.lyx.org}}
+}
+
+@MISC{javascript,
+ author = {Adobe Solutions Network},
+ title = {{Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Reference}},
+ howpublished = {\url{http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/acrobat/sdk/pdf/javascript/AcroJS.pdf}}
+}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `powerdot.bib'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e56bc583192
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e0e38b9fdbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdot.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2807 @@
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Hendri Adriaens and Christopher Ellison
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% Version 1.4g prepared by Herbert Voss
+%% Additional work for the documentation by Patrice Mégret
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "unmaintained".
+%%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{fourier}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\usepackage{enumitem}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{pst-text}
+\usepackage{listings}
+\usepackage{array}
+\usepackage{xkeyval}
+\usepackage[section]{placeins}
+\addtolength\textheight{2cm}
+\addtolength\topmargin{-1cm}
+\lstnewenvironment{command}{%
+ \lstset{columns=flexible,frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{blue!20},%
+ xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep,escapeinside=`',gobble=1}}{}
+\lstnewenvironment{example}[1][]{%
+ \lstset{basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,columns=flexible,frame=single,%
+ backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},xleftmargin=\fboxsep,%
+ xrightmargin=\fboxsep,gobble=1,%
+ language=[LaTeX]TeX,keywordstyle=\color{blue},%
+ moretexcs=[1]{color,ProvidesPackage},%
+ moretexcs=[2]{onslide,pause,pdsetup,maketitle,tableofcontents},%
+ texcsstyle=[2]\color{red}%
+ }\lstset{#1}}{}
+\def\mktitledecor{%
+ \rput[tl]{90}(-5.5,-26.51){%
+ \psline[linewidth=1pt](0,1.5)(\paperheight,1.5)%
+ \rput[lB](.075\paperheight,.5){\pscharpath[linecolor=blue!50,%
+ fillcolor=yellow!20,fillstyle=solid,linewidth=.5pt]%
+ {\Huge\bfseries\sffamily powerdot}%
+ }%
+ \rput[rB](.925\paperheight,.5){\pscharpath[linecolor=blue!50,%
+ fillcolor=yellow!20,fillstyle=solid,linewidth=.5pt]%
+ {\Huge\bfseries Documentation}%
+ }%
+ \psline[linewidth=1pt](0,0)(\paperheight,0)%
+ }%
+}
+\makeatletter
+\def\option#1{%
+ \XKV@for@n{#1}\pd@tempa{%
+ \fcolorbox{black}{red!20}{\texttt\pd@tempa}\quad
+ }%
+ \vspace*{.2cm}%
+}
+\def\tableofcontents{\@starttoc{toc}}
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+ \section*{Version history}%
+ For more information on bug fixes, typeset the source code
+ documentation (see section~\ref{sec:source}).\par\medskip
+ \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces
+}{}%
+\def\DescribeMacros{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+ \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Macros}
+\def\Describe@Macros#1{\endgroup\strut
+ \marginpar{\raggedleft
+ \def\@tempa{#1}\count@\z@
+ \XKV@for@o\@tempa\@tempa{%
+ \ifnum\count@>\z@\\\fi\advance\count@\@ne
+ \MacroFont\expandafter\string\@tempa
+ \expandafter\SpecialUsageIndex\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ }}%
+ \@esphack\ignorespaces
+}
+\def\DescribeOption#1{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+ \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1}}%
+ \SpecialOptionIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+\def\PrintDescribeOption#1{\strut\emph{option}\\\MacroFont #1\ }
+\def\SpecialOptionIndex#1{\@bsphack
+ \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
+ (option)\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
+\def\DescribeOptions#1{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+ \marginpar{\raggedleft\strut\emph{options}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=#1\do{%
+ \\\strut\MacroFont\@tempa\SpecialOptionIndex\@tempa
+ }}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
+ \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
+ (environment)\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
+\def\changes@#1#2#3{%
+ \protected@edef\@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\glossary{\textbf{#1}\hfill\emph{(#2)}%
+ \levelchar
+ \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
+ \space\actualchar\generalname
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@gobble\saved@macroname
+ \actualchar\string\verb\quotechar*%
+ \verbatimchar\saved@macroname\verbatimchar
+ \fi
+ :\levelchar #3}%
+ }%
+ \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack
+}
+\makeatother
+\def\PrintChangesX{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\efill\relax
+ \PrintChanges
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\PrintIndexX{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+ \setlength{\columnsep}{18pt}%
+ \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}%
+ \PrintIndex
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\larg#1{{\ttfamily\char`\<}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\>}}
+\def\LyX{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@}
+\def\LyXarrow{\leavevmode\,$\triangleright$\,\allowbreak}
+\let\pf\textsf
+\def\equals{=}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\newcolumntype{d}{c|l}
+\newcolumntype{e}{c|c|c|c}
+\newcolumntype{f}{l|p{8cm}}
+\RecordChanges
+\CodelineIndex
+\newcounter{FAQ}
+\def\question{%
+ \stepcounter{FAQ}%
+ \parskip4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \itemsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \parsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \item[\textbf{Q\arabic{FAQ}}]%
+}
+\def\answer{%
+ \parskip0pt
+ \itemsep0pt
+ \parsep0pt
+ \item[\textbf{A\arabic{FAQ}}]%
+}
+\def\styleexample#1{%
+ \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}{%
+ \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}{%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{1}}%
+ \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
+ {powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}}%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{2}}%
+ \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
+ {powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}}%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{1}}\par
+ }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
+ }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
+}
+
+\def\fileversion{v1.4g}
+\def\filedate{2011/04/25}
+
+ \changes{v1.0}{2005/09/04}{Initial release}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Fixed some small bugs}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \texttt{tocsecindent} and
+ \texttt{tocslideindent} options}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \pf{elcolors}, \pf{aggie}, \pf{husky}
+ and \pf{sailor} styles}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Changed \texttt{size\protect\equals 10}
+ to \texttt{size\protect\equals 10pt}}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \LyX\ layout, description and example}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added graphical examples of styles to documentation}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Improved section title handling}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{\texttt{blackslide} options adds hyperlink
+ to slide and section titles}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Extended FAQ}
+ \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Improved \pf{tycja}, \pf{ciment} and \pf{fyma} styles}
+ \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Added \pf{upen} and \pf{bframe} styles}
+ \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Solved some small bugs}
+ \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Simplified coding of most styles}
+ \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Speeded up compilations}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Solved some small bugs}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Improved \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} handling}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added \pf{horatio}, \pf{paintings}, \pf{klope}, \pf{jefka}
+ and \pf{pazik} styles}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added palettes feature}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added random dots feature}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added optional argument to \cs{maketitle}}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added clock feature}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Updated all styles}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added palettes to \pf{default}, \pf{fyma} and \pf{sailor} styles}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Revised docs}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Updated \LyX\ example and information}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Cleaned up options}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added possibility to create horizontal table of contents}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added logo feature}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added examples and example file}
+ \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added two slide processing methods to do verbatim on slides easily}
+
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2005/12/10}{Moved \texttt{lf} and \texttt{rf} keys from \texttt{global} to \texttt{glslide} family}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2005/12/10}{Added \texttt{cf} option}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2005/12/10}{Updated styles}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2005/12/10}{Solved some small bugs}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2005/12/10}{Moved footers out of slide box in handout mode}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2008/08/24}{Added \texttt{clockformat} and \texttt{clockrefresh} keys to \texttt{global} family}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2008/08/24}{\texttt{blackslide} replaced by the more general \texttt{pauseslide}}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2008/08/24}{\texttt{pauseslide} does not get randomdots anymore}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2008/08/24}{Renames \texttt{nopagebreaks} option to \texttt{nohandoutpagebreaks}}
+ \changes{v1.4 }{2008/08/24}{Added option for no frames in handout mode}
+
+ \changes{v1.4a}{2010/10/07}{fixed bug with geometry 5.x (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4b}{2010/11/16}{fixed bug with centered footnote (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4c}{2010/11/16}{fixed bug with missing macros for centered footer (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4d}{2010/12/03}{fixed misleading comment header of powerdot.cls (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4e}{2010/12/18}{fixed bugs with enumitem (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4f}{2011/04/01}{added paper size smartboard (hv)}
+ \changes{v1.4g}{2011/04/25}{load enumitem version 2.2 and younger (hv)}
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+%\let\Section\section\def\section*#1{\Section*{#1}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
+\title{\vspace*{-2cm}\mktitledecor The \pf{powerdot} class
+\thanks{This class can be downloaded from the CTAN mirrors:
+\texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. See \texttt{powerdot.tex} for
+information on installing \pf{powerdot} into your \LaTeX\
+distribution and for the license of this class.\newline
+This documentation prepared by Herbert Vo\ss}}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison}
+\date{\fileversion\ (\filedate)}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}\noindent
+\pf{powerdot} is a presentation class for \LaTeX\ that allows for
+the quick and easy development of professional presentations. It
+comes with many tools that enhance presentations and aid the
+presenter. Examples are automatic overlays, personal notes and a
+handout mode. To view a presentation, DVI, PS or PDF output can be
+used. A powerful template system is available to easily develop new
+styles. A \LyX\ layout file is provided.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+[\section*{Contents}
+\setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
+\setlength{\columnsep}{18pt}]
+\tableofcontents
+\end{multicols}
+
+\newpage
+\section{Introduction}\label{sec:intro}
+This class gives you the possibility to easily create professionally
+looking slides. The class is designed to make the development of
+presentations as simple as possible so that you can concentrate on
+the actual content instead of keeping yourself busy with technical
+details. Of course, some knowledge of \LaTeX\ is still required
+though.
+
+This class builds on and extends the \pf{prosper} class
+\cite{prosper} and the \pf{HA-prosper} package \cite{HA-prosper}.
+The \pf{HA-prosper} package was initially intended to extend
+\pf{prosper} and correct some bugs and problems of that class. As
+developments on that package progressed, it was found that
+unfortunately, not all of the problems could be overcome with the
+package. That discovery was the start of a new project set up to
+make a new class to replace the \pf{prosper} plus \pf{HA-prosper}
+combination. You're currently reading the result of that project.
+
+The remainder of this section will be devoted to giving a feel of
+what the \pf{powerdot} presentation source looks like and giving an
+overview of this documentation.
+
+The document structure of a presentation is always the same. You can
+find it in the example below.
+
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[<class options>]{powerdot}
+ \pdsetup{<presentation options>}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{a slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{first section}
+ \begin{slide}[<slide options>]{another slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{personal note}
+ The note.
+ \end{note}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+
+There are several elements that define the document structure. First
+of all, the class accepts some class options that control the output
+of the class, for instance, paper type and style. These class
+options will be discussed in section~\ref{sec:classopts}. Then there
+are presentation specific options which control some of the elements
+of the presentation globally, for instance, the footers. These will
+be discussed in section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}.
+
+Once the setup has been decided on, you can use the slide
+environment to produce slides (see section~\ref{sec:slides}) and the
+note environment to produce notes that go with the slides (see
+section~\ref{sec:notes}). You can use overlays to display material
+in steps. This is described in section~\ref{sec:overlays}. The
+|\section| command provides a way to structure your presentation.
+This is discussed in section~\ref{sec:structure}.
+Section~\ref{sec:styles} will show an overview of the styles that
+come with this class and the characteristics of each style.
+Section~\ref{sec:compiling} will tell you more about how to produce
+output. This section contains important information on required
+packages.
+
+Section~\ref{sec:writestyle} is mostly interesting for people that
+want to develop their own style for this class or want to modify an
+existing style. Section~\ref{sec:lyx} explains how \LyX\
+\cite{LyXWeb} can be used to create \pf{powerdot} presentations.
+This documentation concludes with a section devoted to questions
+(section~\ref{sec:questions}), like `Where can I find examples?'. It
+also tells you where to turn to in case your questions are still not
+solved.
+
+\section{Setting up the presentation}\label{sec:setup}
+This section will describe all options that are available to control
+the output of the presentation and the looks of it.
+
+\subsection{Document class options}\label{sec:classopts} We will
+start with the class options that are typed in the |\documentclass|
+command as a comma-separated list. For each option, the preset
+value\footnote{The value that will be used when you don't use the
+option.} will be mentioned in the description. This is the value
+that will be used if you decide to not give a value to the option or
+not use the option at all.
+
+\DescribeOption{mode}
+This options controls the kind of output that we want to produce.
+The preset value is |present|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{mode=present}\\
+This mode is used when you want to create the actual presentation. It
+will enable overlays and transition effects. You can read more about
+overlays in section~\ref{sec:overlays}.
+\item\option{mode=print}\\
+This mode can be used when printing the slides including their visual
+markup, but without any overlay or transition effects.
+\item\option{mode=handout}\\
+This mode will produce a black and white overview of your slides that
+can be used to make personal notes on, for distribution to students,
+a personal guide during your talk, etcetera.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{nohandoutpagebreaks}\option{nohandoutpagebreaks}\\
+By default, the handout mode produces a document with two slides per
+page. If you want to fit more slides on a page, specify this option
+in the |\documentclass| command and \pf{powerdot} will let \LaTeX\
+decide on the places to insert a page break, namely when a page is
+full.
+\item\DescribeOption{nohandoutframes}\option{nohandoutframes}\\
+In handout mode, each slide is contained in a frame by default. This option turns the frames off.
+\end{description}
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{paper} This option has three possible values. The
+preset value is |screen|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{paper=screen}\\
+This is a special format with screen optimized ratio (4/3). The
+actual page dimensions will be 8.25 inch by 11 inch. This paper format
+is not available for print or handout mode. In these modes, \pf{powerdot}
+will switch to a4 paper and put a warning that it did this in the
+log file of your presentation.
+\item\option{paper=a4paper}\\
+A4 paper will be used for the presentation or handout.
+\item\option{paper=letterpaper}\\
+Letter size paper will be used.
+\item\option{paper=smartboard}\\
+smartboard size will be used (\verb|papersize={900pt,1440pt}|).
+\end{description}
+Some important information with respect to paper size, compiling and
+viewing presentations is available in section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
+
+\DescribeOption{orient} This controls the orientation of the
+presentation. The preset value is |landscape|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{orient=landscape}\\
+The presentation will be in landscape format. This value is not
+available in handout mode. In that mode, \pf{powerdot} will switch
+to portrait orientation and will warn you about this in the log
+file.
+\item\option{orient=portrait}\\ This produces slides in portrait
+format. Notice that not all styles support portrait orientation. Please
+refer to section~\ref{sec:styles} for information about which styles
+do support the portrait orientation.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{display} This controls the production of slides and
+notes. The preset value is |slides|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{display=slides}\\
+This will only typeset the slides in your presentation.
+\item\option{display=slidesnotes}\\
+This will typeset both the slides and the notes in your
+presentation. See also section~\ref{sec:notes} for more information
+about notes.
+\item\option{display=notes}\\
+This will typeset the notes only.
+\end{description}
+
+Here are some more options to control the output.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{size}\option{size}\\
+This is the size of the normal text font in points. Possible values
+are 8pt, 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt, 17pt and 20pt and the preset
+value is 11pt.\footnote{Note that sizes other than 10pt, 11pt and
+12pt are non-standard and it is assumed that you have the
+\pf{extsizes} bundle \cite{extsizes} installed, which provides these
+sizes.}
+\item\DescribeOption{style}\option{style}\\
+This controls the style to be loaded for the presentation. By
+default, the \pf{default} style will be loaded. For more styles, see
+section~\ref{sec:styles}.
+\item\DescribeOption{fleqn}\option{fleqn}\\
+This option makes equations flushed left. It does the same as the
+equally named option for the article class.
+\item\DescribeOption{leqno}\option{leqno}\\
+Put equation numbers at the left. Also the same as in the article
+class.
+\item\DescribeOption{nopsheader}\option{nopsheader}\\
+By default, \pf{powerdot} will write a postscript command to the ps
+file to make sure that post processors like ps2pdf know which paper
+to use without the need to specify it on the command line. See also
+section~\ref{sec:compiling}. If you experience problems with post
+processing or printing or you want to specify the paper size in the
+post processing steps yourself, use this option.
+\item\DescribeOption{hlentries}\option{hlentries}\\
+This highlights table of contents entries when the entry matches
+with the current slide and its preset value is |true|. See also
+section~\ref{sec:structure}. If you don't want highlighting of table
+of contents entries (for instance in print mode), use
+|hlentries=false|.
+\item\DescribeOption{hlsections}\option{hlsections}\\
+This highlights table of contents sections when the section matches
+with the current section in the presentation and is preset to |false|.
+See also section~\ref{sec:structure}. Specifying this
+option turns highlighting of sections on. This could be useful when
+you are using a style that implements a split table of contents.
+\item\DescribeOption{pauseslide}\option{pauseslide}\\
+This option inserts an empty slide (black by default) in the presentation on page 1 and
+will automatically advance to page 2 when opening the presentation
+in a PDF viewer like Acrobat (Reader). The option also inserts a
+link behind every slide or section title that brings you to the
+pause slide when clicked. When you click anywhere in the pause
+slide, you will go back to the originating slide. This option can be
+used to temporarily pause a presentation, for instance, to do a
+proof on the black board. You can use a different color than black
+by specifying it after the option, for instance, |pauseslide=white|.
+\item\DescribeOptions{clock}\option{clock}\\
+This displays a small digital clock on slides which you can use to
+check the time left for your presentation.
+\end{description}
+
+Here is an example of a |\documentclass| command.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=screen,
+ mode=present,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nohandoutpagebreaks,
+ pauseslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{example}
+This example sets up a presentation in \pf{tycja} style, with a black
+slide, normal size 12 points and flushed left equations.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=letterpaper,
+ mode=handout,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nohandoutpagebreaks,
+ pauseslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{example}
+Changing the |paper| and |mode| options, now produces a handout with
+possibly more than two slides per page due to the |nohandoutpagebreaks|
+option.
+
+\subsection{Setup options}\label{sec:pdsetup}
+\DescribeMacro{\pdsetup}
+There are several extra options that can help customizing your
+presentation. These options are not available via the
+|\documentclass| command. This has a technical reason.\footnote{The
+interested reader is referred to the section about the \pf{xkvltxp}
+package in the \pf{xkeyval} package documentation \cite{xkeyval}.}
+We distinguish two types of options. Options that can only be set
+globally (acting for the entire presentation) using the |\pdsetup|
+command and options that can be accessed both globally (via
+|\pdsetup|) and locally (via slide environments, see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+
+\subsubsection{Global options}\label{sec:gopts}
+This section describes options that can only be used globally in the
+preamble of your presentation via the |\pdsetup| command.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{palette}\option{palette}\\
+This specifies the palette to be used. A palette is a set of colors
+defined by a style. To find out which palettes are defined by each
+style, see section~\ref{sec:styles}.
+\item\DescribeOption{theslide}\option{theslide}\\
+This option controls how the slide number appears on the slide. This
+is preset to the value |\arabic{slide}~/~\pageref*{lastslide}|,
+which could appear like |5/22|. Notice that the |\arabic{slide}|
+typesets the number of the current slide and that
+|\pageref*{lastslide}| typesets the number of the last
+slide.\footnote{We use the starred version of \cs{pageref} which is
+defined by \pf{hyperref} and does not create a link to the page that
+it is referring to.}
+\item\DescribeOption{thenote}\option{thenote}\\
+This is similar to the |theslide| option, but typesets the slide
+numbers of notes. The preset value is
+|note~\arabic{note}~of~slide~\arabic{slide}| and |\arabic{note}|
+here typesets the number of the current note that goes with the
+current slide. This could appear like |note 2 of slide 7|.
+\item\DescribeOption{counters}\option{counters}\\
+The |counters| option lists counters that you might want to protect
+on overlays. As material on overlays (see
+section~\ref{sec:overlays}) is processed multiple times, also
+\LaTeX\ counters, like the |equation| counter, might be increased
+too often. To avoid that your equations get different numbers on
+every overlay, use this option. The |equation|, |table|, |figure|,
+|footnote| and |mpfootnote| counters are already protected for you.
+If you use extra counters, for instance for theorems, list them in
+this option. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ counters={theorem,lemma}
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOption{list}\option{list}\\
+This option takes a list of options that will be passed on to the
+\pf{enumitem} package that controls the layout of lists created by
+the |enumerate| and |itemize| environments. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
+\end{example}
+See for more information on controlling the layout of lists the
+\pf{enumitem} package \cite{enumitem}.
+\item\DescribeOptions{enumerate,itemize}\option{enumerate,itemize}\\
+As the |list| option, but only control |enumerate| and |itemize|
+environments respectively.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockformat}\option{clockformat}\\
+This option specifies the format of the clock. The format is set using
+Acrobat's |util.printd| function.\footnote{For a complete listing of
+allowable formats, consult the \textit{Acrobat JavaScript Scripting
+Reference}\cite{javascript}.} The default value is |HH:MM:ss|, which
+shows a 00-23 hour, 00-59 minute, 00-59 second clock. Example:
+\begin{example}
+clockformat=h:MM tt
+\end{example}
+The above setting will display a 1-12 hour, 00-59 minute, am/pm clock.
+That is, the clock might show |5:53 pm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockrefresh}\option{clockrefresh}\\
+This option should be a number which specifies how often
+the clock is refreshed in milliseconds. The default behavior is to refresh
+the clock every second. Thus, the default value is 1000. Notice, if the
+|clockformat| is such that seconds are not shown, then it makes no sense
+to update that clock every second. A corresponding example:
+\begin{example}
+clockrefresh=60000
+\end{example}
+The interpretation of this is that the clock will be updated every minute.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsubsection{Global and local options}\label{sec:glopts}
+This section describes options that can be used both globally via
+|\pdsetup| and locally via slide environments (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOptions{lf,cf,rf}\option{lf,cf,rf}\\
+This determines the content of the left, center and right footers.
+These are preset to empty.
+\item\DescribeOption{trans}\option{trans}\\
+This option sets the default transition effect to be used in the
+presentation. These transition effects only work after compiling the
+presentation to PDF format. See also section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
+The following transition effects are supported: |Split|, |Blinds|,
+|Box|, |Wipe|, |Dissolve|, |Glitter| and |Replace|. When you are using
+a viewer that understands PDF 1.5, you can also use |Fly|, |Push|,
+|Cover|, |Uncover| or |Fade|. It is important to notice that most
+viewers are case sensitive, so, for instance, |box| will not work.
+
+The preset effect is |Replace| which just replaces one slide with
+another when browsing the slides. Note that some PDF viewers (like
+Acrobat Reader 5 and higher) only produce the transition effect in
+full screen mode. If you want to use a custom transition effect that
+is not listed in the list above (for instance, a wipe effect with a
+custom wipe direction), then that is possible. However,
+\pf{powerdot} will put a warning in your log file that the effect
+that you have chosen, might not work in the PDF viewer. Here is an
+example that does work.
+\begin{example}
+ trans=Wipe /Di 0
+\end{example}
+In Acrobat (Reader), this wipes from left to right instead of the
+default top to bottom. For more information, see a PDF Reference
+Manual.
+\item\DescribeOption{method}\option{method}\\
+This option can be used when a slide contains special material that
+does not get treated in the `usual' way by \LaTeX. Verbatim material
+is an example of this. Possible values are |normal| (the preset value),
+|direct| and |file|. We will come back to this option in detail in
+section~\ref{sec:verbatim}.
+\item\DescribeOptions{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\option{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\\
+If |logopos| is specified, a logo defined by the value of the
+|logocmd| option will be put on slides. The position can be
+specified relative to the width and height of the slide. |{0,0}| is
+the lower left corner of the paper and |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|
+is the upper right corner. For positioning the logo, the |\rput|
+command of \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} is used. This
+command also allows to specify the point of the logo that should be
+positioned there. This point can be entered via the |logohook|
+option and can take the values |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
+|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B| and |c|. For more information about
+|\rput|, consult the \pf{pstricks} documentation. Here is an example
+that integrates the flower of the \pf{default} style into the
+\pf{husky} style.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[style=husky]{powerdot}
+ \pdsetup{
+ logohook=t,
+ logopos={.088\slidewidth,.99\slideheight},
+ logocmd={\includegraphics[height=.08\slideheight]{powerdot-default.ps}}
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The preset value for |logohook| is |tl|.
+\end{description}
+
+A special feature of \pf{powerdot}, which can be used to make
+presentations come alive, is the use of random dots. These dots will
+be placed anywhere on your slides and use the colors defined by the
+palette that you use. Overlays will carry the same dots. This
+feature uses |random.tex| \cite{random}. Several options are
+available to control the appearance of the random dots.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{randomdots}\option{randomdots}\\
+By default, random dots are turned off. If this option is set to
+|true|, random dots will be generated. |false| will turn off the
+feature. When no value is submitted to the option, |true| will be
+used.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dmindots,dmaxdots}\option{dmindots,dmaxdots}\\
+The number of dots per slide is also random. These options set the
+minimum and maximum dots per slide. Preset values are |5| and |40|,
+respectively.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dminsize,dmaxsize}\option{dminsize,dmaxsize}\\
+The minimum and maximum radius of the dots. Preset values are |5pt|
+and |40pt|, respectively.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}
+\option{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}\\
+These options determine the area on the slide that can be used for
+the random dots. These values are preset such that dots go anywhere
+on the slide, but you might want to adjust these such that, for
+instance, dots can only appear in the text area. The preset values
+are |0pt|, |\slidewidth|, |0pt|, |\slideheight|.
+
+Here is an example that allows dots in a smaller rectangle on the
+slide.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ dminwidth=.1\slidewidth,dmaxwidth=.9\slidewidth,
+ dminheight=.2\slideheight,dmaxheight=.8\slideheight
+ }
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOption{dbright}\option{dbright}\\
+This option can be used to adjust the brightness of the dots. The
+number should be an integer between -100 and 100. If the number is
+negative, the color will be adjusted towards black, with -100 giving
+black. If the number is positive, the color will be adjusted towards
+white, with 100 giving white. With a light background, you may want
+to choose |bright| to be positive. With a dark background, you may
+want to set it negative. The preset value is |60|, meaning a mixture
+of 40\% of the original color and 60\% white.
+\item\DescribeOption{dprop}\option{dprop}\\
+This option is used for passing extra parameters to the |\psdot|
+command, which creates the random dots. You could, for instance,
+change the style of the dots or the line width. See for more
+information about |\psdot| the \pf{pstricks} documentation
+\cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}. \pf{powerdot} defines two extra dot
+styles that can be used for the random dots. These styles are
+|ocircle| (open circle) and |osquare| (open square).
+\end{description}
+
+Here are two examples for the use of random dots.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dminwidth=.2\slidewidth
+ }
+\end{example}
+This turns on random dots and doesn't use the left 20\% of the slide
+for placing random dots.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.5pt},
+ dminsize=500pt,dmaxsize=600pt,dmindots=2,dmaxdots=5
+ }
+\end{example}
+This example puts at most 5 big circles on slides. These circles do
+not fit on the slides and you will only see parts of them in the
+shape of curves.
+
+\subsubsection{\cs{pdsetup} example}
+Here is an example of a |\pdsetup| command that one could use to set up
+the presentation.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ lf=My first presentation,
+ rf=For some conference,
+ trans=Wipe,
+ theslide=\arabic{slide},
+ randomdots,dmaxdots=80
+ }
+\end{example}
+This sets the left and right footers and will initialize the
+transition effect to |Wipe|. Further, slide numbers will not include
+the number of the last slide, but only the number of the current
+slide. Finally, slides will be covered with at most 80 random dots.
+
+A small note is necessary with respect to the appearance of footers.
+The slide number (controlled by the |theslide| option) will be added
+to a footer. Most styles add it too the right footer. If both the
+footer and the slide number are non empty, |~--~| will be inserted
+in between them to separate them. Styles might modify this default
+behavior however.
+
+\section{Making slides}\label{sec:slides}
+\subsection{The title slide}\label{sec:titleslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\title}
+\DescribeMacro{\author}
+\DescribeMacro{\and}
+\DescribeMacro{\date}
+\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}
+The title slide is created by the |\maketitle| command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{maketitle}\oarg{options}'
+\end{command}
+Its use is the same as in the standard \LaTeX\ document classes. The
+optional argument \meta{options} can contain any option from
+section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Specifying such an option in the
+|\maketitle| command will only have an effect on the title slide and
+not on other slides. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \title{Title}
+ \author{You \and me}
+ \date{October 7, 2010}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The |author|, |title| and |date| declarations provide the text to be
+used when making a title page. The design of the title page is
+specific to the style in use. Notice the use of |\and| for
+separating multiple authors. See a \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion}
+for more information on commands such as |\title| and |\author|.
+
+\subsection{Other slides}\label{sec:otherslides}
+\DescribeEnv{slide} The centerpiece of every presentation is the
+slide. In \pf{powerdot}, the content of each slide is placed in a
+|slide| environment.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{begin}\texttt{\{slide\}}\oarg{options}\marg{slide title}'
+ `\meta{body}'
+ `\cs{end}\texttt{\{slide\}}'
+\end{command}
+
+In section~\ref{sec:overlays} we'll see how to give some life to the
+slides, but for now, let's look at a simple example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{First slide}
+ Hello World.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The slide environment has one required argument, namely the slide
+title. When a slide is created, the slide title is used to create an
+entry in the table of contents and in the list of bookmarks. The
+table of contents is a listing of the slides and section titles in
+the presentation that appears on each slide.
+
+The table of contents is clickable (when the presentation is
+compiled into PDF) and serves as a nice way to jump from location to
+location within the presentation. The bookmark list is only present
+when compilation is taken all the way to the PDF file format. It
+also serves as a table of contents, but this list does not appear on
+\textit{any} of the slides, but in a separate window in a PDF
+viewer. In the example above, the entries in both table contents and
+the list of bookmarks would be titled |First slide|.
+
+The \meta{options} for the |slide| environment can contain any
+option listed in section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Additionally, the
+following options can be used.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{toc}\option{toc}\\
+When specified, the value is used for the entry in the table of
+contents; otherwise, the slide title is used. If |toc=| is
+specified, then no entry is created.
+\item\DescribeOption{bm}\option{bm}\\
+When specified, the value is used for the bookmark entry; otherwise,
+the slide title is used. If |bm=| is specified, then no entry is
+created.
+\end{description}
+
+These optional arguments are especially useful when the title of a
+slide is extremely long or when the title contains \LaTeX\ commands
+that do not render correctly in the bookmarks.\footnote{The
+bookmarking procedure uses \cs{pdfstringdef} from the \pf{hyperref}
+package, and it can process accented characters such as \cs{"i}.}
+When specifying entries, be sure to hide special characters `|,|'
+and `|=|' between curly brackets `|{|' and `|}|'. Let's look at an
+example that uses these optional arguments.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm={LaTeX, i*i=-1}]{\color{red}\LaTeX, $i^2=-1$}
+ My slide contents.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+
+In this example, the slide title will appear as {\color{red}\LaTeX,
+$i^2=-1$}. This text will not render correctly in a bookmark entry.
+An attempt is made to correct this, but often, the correction does
+not produce an equivalent text. This particular title would be
+rendered in the bookmark list as |redLaTeX, i2=-1|. On the other
+hand, the manually specified bookmark entry is rendered as:
+|LaTeX, i*i=-1|. Notice, no entry is created in the table of contents,
+because of the use of |toc=|.
+
+In addition to the |slide| environment, each individual style can
+define its own environments. Many styles have a |wideslide|
+environment. The idea is that one might have information that does
+not fit nicely on a slide with a table of contents listed, as this
+consumes some space. In such cases, it is preferable to use a slide
+that does not list the table of contents. The |wideslide|
+environment provides this functionality and has more space for the
+actual slide content. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for information
+on the various environments provided by the styles.
+
+\section{Overlays}\label{sec:overlays}
+It is often the case that you don't want all the information on the
+slide to appear at once. Rather, the information should appear one
+item at a time. In \pf{powerdot}, this is achieved with overlays.
+Each slide can be comprised of many overlays, and the overlays are
+displayed one at a time.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{pause} command}\label{sec:pause}
+\DescribeMacro{\pause} The easiest way to display information
+sequentially is to use the |\pause| command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pause}\oarg{number}'
+\end{command}
+Below is a simple example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple overlay}
+ power\pause dot
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The slide's information is displayed and continues until the
+|\pause| command is encountered. No further output within the same
+slide is displayed until the click of the mouse or the touch of the
+keyboard. Then, the content will continue to display until all the
+information is displayed or until another |\pause| command is
+encountered. In this example, |power| is displayed on the first
+overlay, and |powerdot| is the displayed on the second overlay. The
+|\pause| command is often used within the |itemize| and |enumerate|
+environments. For example,
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Multiple pauses}
+ power\pause dot \pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Let me pause\ldots \pause
+ \item \ldots while I talk \pause and chew bubble gum. \pause
+ \item Perhaps you'll be persuaded.
+ \item Perhaps not.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Since |\pause| was used before the |itemize| environment, no item
+will appear until the third overlay. Then, each item will be
+displayed one at a time, each on their own overlay. More information
+on using lists will follow in the next section.
+
+The optional argument of the |\pause| command specifies the number
+of overlays to pause. An example usage is:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Pause longer}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause[2]
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+In the example above, item |C| will appear on the fourth overlay.
+The usefulness of this option will become more apparent in the next
+section; so we will revisit a similar example at that time.
+
+\subsection{List environments}\label{sec:lists}
+The list environments, |itemize| and |enumerate|, have special
+treatments in \pf{powerdot}. They have an optional argument that
+will be taken care off by the \pf{enumitem} package (see
+\cite{enumitem}). \pf{powerdot} supplies an extra key for this
+optional argument. In the examples that follow, features will be
+described using the |itemize| environment but they also apply to the
+|enumerate| environment.
+
+Here is the typical usage of the |itemize| environment:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Basic itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The display is simple, each item appears one at a time with each
+overlay.
+
+\DescribeOption{type}
+Suppose we wanted every item to show, but we only wanted one item to
+appear `active' at once. This can be accomplished via the |type|
+option for the |itemize| environment. The preset value is |0|.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Now, every item will be displayed in the \emph{inactive
+color}\index{inactive color|usage} (which is defined by the style
+that you use), and the item's font color will become the active one
+on the overlay that it would normally appear on. The default
+behavior is given by |type=0|. It is still possible to pass
+optional arguments to \pf{enumitem} via the second optional argument:
+
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
+ \begin{enumerate}[type=1][label=\romani*)]
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Take care, that this must always be the second optional argument!
+It is possible to leave the first one empty, which is valid only for \pf{powerdot}.
+
+
+Lists can also be nested to create complicated structures. When a
+list is nested, it inherits the setting of the |type| option from
+the `parent' list, but that can be overruled by specifying the
+|type| option in the optional argument of the nested list. We
+present here one example, but many more can be created by nesting
+lists of different types in different ways.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Nested lists}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A\pause
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item B\pause
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+This displays |A| and |B| on the first overlay, but |B| is inactive.
+On overlay 2, |B| will become active and on overlay 3, |C| will
+become visible.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{item} command}
+\DescribeMacro{\item}
+The |\item| command has an extra \emph{optional} argument in
+\pf{powerdot} which allows for creating overlays in a more flexible
+way then |\pause| provides.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{item}\oarg{label}\larg{overlays}'
+\end{command}
+This optional argument should contain an overlay specification
+stating on which overlays you want the item to appear. This
+specification is a comma separated list where each item can used the
+notation as in table \ref{tab:item}.
+\begin{table}[htb]\centering
+\begin{tabular}{d}
+Syntax&Meaning\\\hline
+\texttt{x}&Only overlay \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{-x}&All overlays up to and including \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{x-}&All overlays from \texttt{x}, including \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{x-y}&All overlays from \texttt{x} to \texttt{y},
+including \texttt{x} and \texttt{y}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\cs{item} and \cs{onslide} notation}\label{tab:item}
+\end{table}
+The \meta{label} argument is the standard optional argument for
+|\item| in \LaTeX. A \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion} can tell you
+more about this argument.
+
+Here is an example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Active itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item<1> A
+ \item<2> B
+ \item<3> C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Here we have said that |A| should only be active on overlay 1, |B|
+should only be active on overlay 2, and |C| should only be active on
+overlay 3. Again, when the item is not active, it appears in the
+inactive color because of |type=1|.
+
+If |type=0| is specified and if each item is given an overlay
+option, then each item will appear only when it is active. When the
+item is not active, then it will not show on the slide at all. More
+examples demonstrating the syntax for \meta{overlays} will be
+discussed in the next section.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{onslide} command}\label{sec:onslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide} Overlays can also be achieved using the
+|\onslide| command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{onslide}\marg{overlays}\marg{text}'
+\end{command}
+This command takes an \meta{overlays} specification as first
+argument and the \meta{text} to apply it to as second argument. The
+\meta{overlays} on which the text will appear are specified as a
+comma separated list with syntax as in table \ref{tab:item}. We
+start off with a simple example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide}
+ \onslide{1,2}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+We have instructed |power| to appear on overlays one and two, and
+|dot| to appear only on overlay two. As you might guess, this
+example has the same output as our first |\pause| example. Yet, it
+is clearly the case that our syntax is more complicated. However,
+this slight ``complication'' also allows for much more flexibility.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide+}Consider the above example with the
+following modifications:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide+}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The |\onslide+| command displays its content in a different manner
+altogether. Now, |dot| appears on every overlay, but it is in
+inactive color\index{inactive color|usage} and matches the normal
+font color \textit{only} on overlay two. This is comparable to the
+|type=1| behavior for lists (see section~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+When executing this example, we will also notice that the |\onslide|
+command does hide material, but still reserves the right amount of
+space for it: on overlay 2, the |dot|s appear right above each
+other. The next command does not reserve space.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide*} Instead of hiding and reserving space
+(|\onslide|) or putting \meta{text} in the inactive color
+(|\onslide+|) when the overlay doesn't match \meta{overlays}, this
+command just eats the material altogether. To understand the
+differences, consider the following example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide*}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide*}: \onslide*{1}{power}\onslide*{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The output of the first two lines, we are already familiar with. The
+third line displays |power| on overlay 1 and |dot| on overlay 2, but
+no space for |power| is reserved on overlay 2. Hence |dot| will
+start on the cursor position that |power| started on overlay 1 and
+it is not aligned below the other two |dots|.
+
+We finish with an example of the syntax that is possible with
+|\item| and |\onslide|. Remember that these commands take a comma
+separated list for the \meta{overlays} specification and that each
+element can used the syntax as explained in table \ref{tab:item}.
+The various variations are demonstrated in the example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Lists}
+ \onslide{10}{on overlay 10 only}\par
+ \onslide{-5}{on every overlay before and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{5-}{on every overlay after and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{2-5}{on overlays 2 through 5, inclusive}\par
+ \onslide{-3,5-7,9-}{on every overlay except overlays 4 and 8}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Relative overlays}
+Sometimes it is a pain to keep track of when an item should appear
+or become active. You might, for example, just care that some text
+appears on the overlay \textit{after} some other item. This
+functionality is provided through the use of relative overlays which
+should not be used outside list environments that use |\item|. Let's
+consider a simple, illuminating example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Relative overlays}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \onslide{+1}{(visible 1 overlay after B)}\pause
+ \item C \onslide{+2-}{(appears 2 overlays after C, visible until the end)}
+ \pause
+ \item D \onslide{+1-6}{(appears 1 overlay after D, visible until overlay 6)}
+ \pause
+ \item E \pause
+ \item F \pause
+ \item G \onslide{+1-+3}{(appears 1 overlay after G for 3 overlays)}\pause
+ \item H \pause
+ \item I \pause
+ \item J \pause
+ \item K
+ \End{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+As you can see, we still use |\onslide|. The only change is with the
+syntax of the list of overlays. Now, we can specify a `|+|' symbol
+in the list. In its simplest usage, |\onslide{+1}| will make text
+display one overlay after the overlay it would \textit{normally}
+appear on. You can still use the syntax in table \ref{tab:item}.
+These are demonstrated in the above example. Notice,
+|\onslide{+1-6}| means that the text will appear one overlay after
+the overlay it would normally appear on and that the text should
+remain shown until overlay seven. To make text appear for a range of
+relative overlays, see the final demonstration in the above example.
+
+\section{Presentation structure}\label{sec:structure}
+\subsection{Making sections}\label{sec:section}
+\DescribeMacro{\section}
+This section describes the |\section| command which provides a way
+to structure a presentation.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{section}\oarg{options}\marg{section title}'
+\end{command}
+This command will produce a slide with \meta{section title} on it
+and will also use this text to create sections in the table of
+contents and in the bookmarks list. There are several \meta{options}
+to control its output.
+
+\DescribeOption{tocsection} This option controls the creation of a
+section in the table of contents. The preset value is |true|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{tocsection=true}\\
+This does create a section in the table of contents. This means that
+all following slides, until the next section, will be nested under
+this section.
+\item\option{tocsection=false}\\
+This does not create a section in the table of contents and hence
+the section will be listed as an ordinary slide.
+\item\option{tocsection=hidden}\\
+This does create a section in the table of contents, but this is
+only visible when you view a slide that is part of this section.
+This could be used to append a section to the presentation which you
+can discuss if there is some extra time.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{slide} This option controls whether the |\section|
+command creates a slide. The preset value is |true|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{slide=true}\\
+A slide is created.
+\item\option{slide=false}\\
+No slide will be created. If also |tocsection| is |false|, the
+|\section| command doesn't do anything. If it does create a table of
+contents section (|tocsection=| |true| or |hidden|), its link will
+point to the first slide in the section as the section itself
+doesn't have a slide.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{template} This option can be used to make the
+section slide with another template. By default, a normal |slide|
+environment is used to create the section slide, but if a style
+offers other templates that could be used for this purpose (for
+instance, the |wideslide| environment), then you can use this option
+to select that template. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for an
+overview of the available templates with every style.
+
+Finally, all options available to normal slides are available to
+slides created by |\section| as well (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+However, when the section does make a |tocsection|, |toc=| or |bm=|
+won't remove the table of contents entry or the bookmark
+respectively.
+
+\subsection{Making an overview}\label{sec:tableofcontents}
+\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}
+This command creates an overview of your presentation and can only
+be used on a slide.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{tableofcontents}\oarg{options}'
+\end{command}
+There are several \meta{options} to control the output of this
+command.
+
+\DescribeOption{type}
+This option controls whether certain material (depending on the
+input in the |content| option below) will be hidden or displayed in
+the inactive color\index{inactive color|usage}. The preset value is
+|0|. Compare with the |type| option for list environments
+(section~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{type=0}\\
+When material is not of the requested type as specified in the
+|content| option, it will be hidden.
+\item\option{type=1}\\
+As |type=0|, but instead of hiding material, it will be typeset in
+the inactive color.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{content}
+The |content| option controls which elements will be included in the
+overview. The preset value is |all|. The description below assumes
+that |type=0| was chosen, but the alternative text for |type=1| can
+easily be deduced.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{content=all}\\
+This will display a full overview of your presentation including all
+sections and slides, except the slides in hidden sections (see
+section~\ref{sec:section}).
+\item\option{content=sections}\\
+This displays only the sections in the presentation.
+\item\option{content=currentsection}\\
+This displays the current section only.
+\item\option{content=future}\\
+This displays all content starting from the current slide.
+\item\option{content=futuresections}\\
+This displays all sections, starting from the current section.
+\end{description}
+
+We finish this section with a small example that will demonstrate
+how you can make a presentation that contains an overall overview of
+sections in the presentation, giving a general idea of the content,
+and per section a detailed overview of the slides in that section.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview}
+ \tableofcontents[content=sections]
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{First section}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview of the first section}
+ \tableofcontents[content=currentsection,type=1]
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{Some slide}
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{Second section}
+ ...
+\end{example}
+
+\section{Miscellaneous}
+\subsection{Notes}\label{sec:notes}
+\DescribeEnv{note}
+The |note| environment can be used to make personal notes that
+accompany a slide. You can control displaying notes using the
+|display| option (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}). Here is an
+example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Chewing gum}
+ ...
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{Reminder for chewing gum}
+ Don't forget to mention that chewing gum is sticky.
+ \end{note}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Empty slides}\label{sec:emptyslides}
+\DescribeEnv{emptyslide}
+The |emptyslide| environment creates a totally empty slide. The text
+box on the slide can be used for special things like displaying
+photos. This allows for creating a dia show. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{emptyslide}{}
+ \centering
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \includegraphics[height=0.8\slideheight]{me_chewing_gum.eps}
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \end{emptyslide}
+\end{example}
+The |\includegraphics| command is defined by the \pf{graphicx}
+package \cite{graphics}. The |\stretch| command is used to
+vertically center the picture. Both commands are described in your
+favorite \LaTeX\ manual, for instance \cite{companion}. Note that
+you can use the lengths |\slideheight| and |\slidewidth| to scale
+pictures to fit nicely on the slide.
+
+\subsection{Bibliography slide}\label{sec:bib}
+\DescribeEnv{thebibliography}
+\pf{powerdot} redefines the standard \pf{article}
+|thebibliography| environment to suppress the creation of a section
+heading and running headers. All other properties are maintained.
+You can do either of the next two (depending whether you are
+using BiB\TeX\ or not):\\
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+ \end{slide}
+\begin{slide}{References}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{1}
+ \bibitem{someone} Article of someone.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \bibliography{YourBib}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+\end{minipage}
+
+In case you have a big reference list that you want to spread over
+multiple slides, have a look at the packages \pf{natbib} and
+\pf{bibentry} \cite{natbib}. Using both packages allows you to do:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{References (1)}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \nobibliography{YourBib}
+ \bibentry{someone1}
+ \bibentry{someone2}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References (2)}
+ \bibentry{someone3}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Have a look at your favorite \LaTeX\ manual for more information
+about citations and bibliographies.
+
+\subsection{Verbatim on slides}\label{sec:verbatim}\DescribeOption{verbatim}
+\pf{powerdot} has three different methods of processing slides, from
+which two have mainly been developed to make the inclusion of
+verbatim content\footnote{And other content that needs catcode
+changes when processing.} on slides easier. These methods can be
+accessed by the |method| key which is available in slide
+environments and the |\pdsetup| command (see
+section~\ref{sec:glopts}).
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{method=normal}\\
+This is the preset method for processing slides. It is fast and
+allows for overlays, but it does not allow for
+verbatim.\footnote{Except when it has been saved in a box outside
+the slide.}
+\item\option{method=direct}\\
+This method is also fast, but does not allow for overlays. Overlays
+will silently be disabled. However, it does allow for verbatim
+content on slides.
+\item\option{method=file}\\
+This method uses a temporary file to export the slide body to and
+read it back in. This method does allow for verbatim content and
+overlays, but could be slow when many slides use this method because
+the filesystem is used.
+\end{description}
+
+Below is an example demonstrating the use of all three different
+methods of slide processing.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \lstnewenvironment{code}{
+ \lstset{frame=single,escapeinside=`',
+ backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily}
+ }{}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide 1}
+ Normal \pause content.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=direct]{Slide 2}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=file]{Slide 3}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The first slide shows the default behavior for normal content. It
+produces two overlays. The second slide does not produce overlays,
+despite the use of the |\pause| command. This command has been
+disabled by choosing the |direct| method to process the verbatim
+content. The third slide has the same body as the second slide, but
+now does create two overlays, because the method using a temporary
+file has been chosen. Notice that we used |\pause| inside the listing,
+but that it can also be used outside the listing.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{twocolumn} command}\label{sec:twocolumn}
+\DescribeMacro{\twocolumn}
+The |\twocolumn| macro allows to split content into two columns.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{twocolumn}\oarg{options}\marg{left}\marg{right}'
+\end{command}
+This typesets \meta{left} and \meta{right} in two columns. The
+dimensions of those columns can be controlled by \meta{options}.
+Below are the available options.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{lineheight}\option{lineheight}\\
+If |lineheight| is specified, a line of the specified height will be
+created using |\psline| in between the two columns. Example:
+|lineheight=6cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{lineprop}\option{lineprop}\\
+Any \pf{pstricks} declaration to specify the line properties. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ lineprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt}
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOptions{lfrheight,lfrprop}\option{lfrheight,lfrprop}\\
+The first creates a frame of the specified height around the left
+column. The second is as |lineprop|, but for the left frame.
+\item\DescribeOptions{rfrheight,rfrprop}\option{rfrheight,rfrprop}\\
+As |lfrheight| and |lfrprop|, but for the right frame.
+\item\DescribeOptions{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\option{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\\
+Width of the left and right columns. Both are preset to: |0.47\linewidth|.
+\item\DescribeOption{frsep}\option{frsep}\\
+Space between text and the frames. Preset: |1.5mm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{colsep}\option{colsep}\\
+Space between the two columns. Preset: |0.06\linewidth|.
+\item\DescribeOption{topsep}\option{topsep}\\
+The extra space (additional to |\baselineskip|) between text above
+the columns and the text within the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{bottomsep}\option{bottomsep}\\
+Idem for the bottom of the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{indent}\option{indent}\\
+Horizontal indent left to the left column. Preset: |0cm|.
+\end{description}
+The dimensions described above are represented graphically in
+figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}.
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{pspicture}(0,.5)(13,10.5)
+\psline(0,0.5)(0,10)
+\rput[tl](.05,9.95){Top}
+\psframe[dimen=middle](1,9)(7,2)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,9)(11,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(8.5,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(11,2)
+\qdisk(1.7,8.3){.1cm}
+\psset{linestyle=dashed}
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(1.7,3)
+\psline{C-C}(6.3,5)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(11,9)(12,9)
+\psline{C-C}(11,2)(12,2)
+\psline{C-C}(11,7)(12,7)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(12,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(9.2,3)
+\rput[tl](1.75,8.25){Left column text}
+\rput[tl](9.25,8.25){Right column text}
+\rput[tl](.05,1){Bottom}
+\psset{linestyle=dotted,dotsep=2pt}
+\psline(0,8.3)(1.7,8.3)
+\psline(0,9.6)(1,9.6)
+\psline(0,2)(1,2)
+\psline(0,1.1)(1,1.1)
+\psset{linestyle=solid}
+\psline{<->}(.2,8.33)(.2,9.57)
+\psline{<->}(4,8.33)(4,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(1.73,7)(6.27,7)
+\psline{<->}(1.03,6.5)(1.67,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(0.03,5.5)(1.67,5.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,7.4)(9.17,7.4)
+\psline{<->}(8.53,6.5)(9.17,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,6.5)(6.97,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(10.7,8.33)(10.7,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(7.3,8.97)(7.3,2.03)
+\psline{<->}(.2,1.13)(.2,1.97)
+\psline{->}(1.7,9.3)(1.7,8.45)
+\psline{<-}(9.23,7)(11,7)
+\cput(4,6.6){\small 1}
+\cput(11.1,6.6){\small 2}
+\cput(8,7){\small 3}
+\cput(7.7,3){\small 4}
+\cput(4.4,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(1.35,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(8.85,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(11.1,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(6.65,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(0.6,8.95){\small 6}
+\cput(0.6,5.1){\small 7}
+\cput(0.6,1.55){\small 8}
+\cput(1.7,9.6){\small 9}
+\end{pspicture}
+\begin{tabular}{c p{4cm}cl}
+\multicolumn{4}{c}{Meaning of the labels}\\\hline
+1&|lcolwidth|&5&|frsep|\\
+2&|rcolwidth|&6&|topsep|\\
+3&|colsep|&7&|indent|\\
+4&|lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,&8&|bottomsep|\\
+&|lineheight|&9&Reference point
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Two-column dimensions.}\label{fig:twocolumndim}
+\end{figure}
+Important to notice is that the |\twocolumn| macro uses the current
+cursor position as the reference point to position the first line of
+text of the left column (see also figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}). This
+means that optional frames can extend to the text on the previous
+line. Use for instance |topsep=0.3cm| in that case to add extra
+space between the two lines of text. The preset value of |topsep|
+is based on the situation that there is no text on top of the two
+columns. In that case, it is best to locate the first line of text
+of the left column at the same spot as text that is not created by
+|\twocolumn| on other slides. The setting |topsep=0cm| does exactly
+this. However, with a combination of |topsep| and |indent| you can
+change this behavior and position the first line of text of the left
+column anywhere you want.
+
+The |\twocolumn| macro computes the height of the construction to
+position text below the construction correctly. The computation is
+done by taking the maximum height of |lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,
+|lineheight| (if specified) and the left and right column content.
+Hence when frames nor a line is requested, |bottomsep| is the
+vertical space between the lowest line of text in the columns and
+the text below the columns (additional to |\baselineskip|). Here is
+an example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Two columns}
+ Here are two columns.
+ \twocolumn[
+ lfrprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt},
+ lfrheight=4cm,rfrheight=5cm,lineheight=3cm,topsep=0.3cm
+ ]{left}{right}
+ Those were two columns.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Note that the use of the \pf{xkeyval} commands |\savevalue| and
+|\usevalue| \index{savevalue=\verb!*+\savevalue+|usage}
+\index{usevalue=\verb!*+\usevalue+|usage} could be handy here, for
+instance for copying the properties of the left frame to the right
+frame. This avoids typing them twice and avoids making errors
+resulting in different frames. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \twocolumn[
+ \savevalue{lfrheight}=3cm,
+ \savevalue{lfrprop}={
+ linestyle=dotted,framearc=.2,linewidth=3pt},
+ rfrheight=\usevalue{lfrheight},
+ rfrprop=\usevalue{lfrprop}
+ ]{left}{right}
+\end{example}
+See the \pf{xkeyval} documentation \cite{xkeyval} for more
+information about |\savevalue| and |\usevalue|.
+
+\section{Available styles}\label{sec:styles}
+\pf{powerdot} comes with a number of styles which are listed in the
+overview below. The characteristics of each style are described
+shortly and a sample of a title slide and a normal slide is provided
+for each style. Styles support the |wideslide| environment, have a
+table of contents on the left part of the paper in landscape
+orientation and on the bottom part in portrait orientation and
+support portrait orientation unless states otherwise.
+\begin{description}
+\item\pf{default}\\
+This style provides six different palettes. A flower in the top left
+corner decorates the slides for all palettes. The default palette is
+\texttt{blue} which has as main colors light blue and white. You can
+see an example of that palette below. Other available palettes are
+\texttt{red}, \texttt{green}, \texttt{yellow}, \texttt{brown} and
+\texttt{purple}.\\
+\styleexample{default}
+\item\pf{simple}\\
+This is a simple style in black and white. This style could be
+useful if you want to print your slides.\\
+\styleexample{simple}
+\item\pf{tycja}\\
+This style is set in shades of yellow and dark blue. The table of
+contents on slides is on the right side of the paper in landscape
+orientation and on the bottom part in portrait.\\
+\styleexample{tycja}
+\item\pf{ikeda}\\
+This style uses dark shades of red and blue and a light text color.
+It has nice patterns on the slide for decoration.\\
+\styleexample{ikeda}
+\item\pf{fyma}\\
+This style was originally created by Laurent Jacques for
+\pf{prosper}. Based on that style, he created a version for
+\pf{HA-prosper} with extended features. With his kind permission,
+this style has been converted by Shun'ichi J. Amano for
+\pf{powerdot}. The style has an elegant design with a light blue and
+white gradient background in the default \texttt{blue} palette.
+Other available palettes are \texttt{green}, \texttt{gray},
+\texttt{brown} and \texttt{orange}. It has special templates for
+sections on slides and sections on wide slides. Below is a sample of
+the blue palette.\\
+\styleexample{fyma}
+\item\pf{ciment}\\
+This style was originally created by Mathieu Goutelle for
+\pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper}. With his kind permission, this style
+has been converted for \pf{powerdot}. The style has a background
+that is hatched with light gray horizontal lines. Titles and table
+of contents highlighting are done with dark red.\\
+\styleexample{ciment}
+\item\pf{elcolors}\\
+This is a style using light shades of the elementary colors red,
+blue and yellow.\\
+\styleexample{elcolors}
+\item\pf{aggie}\\
+This style was created by Jack Stalnaker for \pf{HA-prosper} and he
+has converted this style for \pf{powerdot}. The style uses dark red
+and light brown colors.\\
+\styleexample{aggie}
+\item\pf{husky}\\
+This style is created by Jack Stalnaker and has a background of
+light gray sun beams combined with dark red highlights.\\
+\styleexample{husky}
+\item\pf{sailor}\\
+This style is contributed by Mael Hill\'ereau and supplies five
+different palettes: \texttt{Sea} (the default), \texttt{River},
+\texttt{Wine}, \texttt{Chocolate} and \texttt{Cocktail}. Below is a
+sample of the palette \texttt{Sea}.\\
+\styleexample{sailor}
+\item\pf{upen}\\
+This style has a nice dark blue background and text in yellow. It is
+contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
+\styleexample{upen}
+\item\pf{bframe}\\
+The \pf{bframe} style has blue frames on the slide in which text is
+positioned. The style is contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
+\styleexample{bframe}
+\item\pf{horatio}\\
+The \pf{horatio} style has been contributed by Michael Lundholm and
+is a more conservative blue style.\\
+\styleexample{horatio}
+\item\pf{paintings}\\
+This is a simple style without a table of contents on slides. It has
+been contributed by Thomas Koepsell and provides 10 different
+palettes. The colors used in the palettes are drawn from famous
+paintings.\footnote{The style defines a color \texttt{pdcolor7}
+which is not used in the style but comes from the same painting and
+complements the other colors. It can be used, for example, to
+highlight text against the main background color.} If you are
+interested, open the style file to read which paintings have been
+used. The available palettes are: \texttt{Syndics} (the default),
+\texttt{Skater}, \texttt{GoldenGate}, \texttt{Lamentation},
+\texttt{HolyWood}, \texttt{Europa}, \texttt{Moitessier},
+\texttt{MayThird}, \texttt{PearlEarring} and \texttt{Charon} (all
+case sensitive). Below is a sample of the \texttt{Syndics}
+palette.\\
+\styleexample{paintings}
+\item\pf{klope}\\
+The \pf{klope} style implements a horizontal table of contents that
+only lists the sections. The style is available in the following
+palettes: \texttt{Spring}, \texttt{PastelFlower}, \texttt{BlueWater}
+and \texttt{BlackWhite}. The \texttt{Spring} palette is the default
+and you can see a sample of that below.\\
+\styleexample{klope}
+\item\pf{jefka}\\
+The \pf{jefka} style comes with four palettes: \texttt{brown} (the
+default), \texttt{seagreen}, \texttt{blue} and \texttt{white}. Below
+you see a sample of the \texttt{brown} palette.\\
+\styleexample{jefka}
+\item\pf{pazik}\\
+This style is available in two palettes: \texttt{red} and
+\texttt{brown}. Below is a sample of the default \texttt{red}
+palette.\\
+\styleexample{pazik}
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Compiling your presentation}\label{sec:compiling}
+\subsection{Dependencies}\label{sec:dependencies}
+In table \ref{tab:dependencies} is a list of packages that
+\pf{powerdot} uses to perform specific tasks. Dependencies of
+packages in this table are not listed. In the table, `required'
+means that you should have a version \emph{at least} as new as
+listed and `tested' means that \pf{powerdot} was tested with this
+version, but that it could equally well work with an older or newer
+version than the one listed in the table. So, when trying to solve
+an error, first concentrate on solving version issues for the
+`required' packages. To find out which version of a package you are
+currently using, put |\listfiles| on the first line of your
+document, run it with \LaTeX, open the |.log| file and read the file
+list (see a \LaTeX\ manual for more information). If you need to
+update a package, you can get it from CTAN \cite{CTAN}.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{e}
+Package/file & Version & Date & Required/tested\\\hline
+\pf{xkeyval} \cite{xkeyval} & 2.5c & 2005/07/10 & required\\
+\texttt{pstricks.sty} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} & 0.2l & 2004/05/12 & required\\
+\pf{xcolor} \cite{xcolor} & 1.11 & 2004/05/09 & required\\
+\pf{enumitem} \cite{enumitem} & 1.0 & 2004/07/19 & required\\
+\pf{article} class & 1.4f & 2004/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{geometry} \cite{geometry} & 5.x & 2010/10/07 & tested\\
+\pf{hyperref} \cite{hyperref} & 6.74m & 2003/11/30 & tested\\
+\pf{graphicx} \cite{graphics} & 1.0f & 1999/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{verbatim} & 1.5q & 2003/08/22 & tested
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Dependencies}\label{tab:dependencies}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Creating and viewing output}\label{sec:creation}
+To compile your presentation, run it with \LaTeX. The DVI that is
+produced this way can be viewed with MiK\TeX's DVI viewer
+YAP.\footnote{Unless you are using \pf{pstricks-add} which distorts
+the coordinate system in DVI.} Unfortunately, xdvi and kdvi (kile)
+do not support all PostScript specials and hence these will display
+the presentation incorrectly. If your DVI viewer does support
+this, make sure that your DVI display settings match that of the
+presentation. In case you are using the |screen| paper, you should
+set the DVI display setting to using the letter paper format. If
+your DVI viewer allows for custom paper formats, use 8.25 inch by 11
+inch.
+
+Note that certain things that are produced with PostScript or PDF
+techniques will not work in a DVI viewer. Examples are hiding of
+material via postscript layers (as is done, for instance, by
+|\pause|, see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and hyperlinks, for
+instance in the table of contents.
+
+If you want to produce a postscript document, run dvips over the DVI
+\emph{without any particular command line options related to
+orientation or paper size}. \pf{powerdot} will write information to
+the DVI file that helps dvips and ps2pdf (ghostscript) to create a
+proper document. If you have some reason that this does not work for
+you and you want to specify the paper and orientation yourself, you
+should use the |nopsheader| option that is described in
+section~\ref{sec:setup}. The PostScript document could, for
+instance, be used to put multiple slides on a page using the |psnup|
+utility.
+
+To create a PDF document for your presentation, run ps2pdf over the
+PS file created with dvips. Also here, you can \emph{leave out any
+command line arguments related to paper size or orientation}. If
+this is problematic for you somehow, use the |nopsheader| option as
+before and specify the paper and orientation at each intermediate
+step yourself.
+
+\section{Creating your own style}\label{sec:writestyle}
+\subsection{General information}
+Writing or customizing \pf{powerdot} styles is simple. If you want
+to modify a style or build a new one, locate the style that you want
+to use as basis in your \TeX\ tree (styles are named as
+|powerdot-<style_name>.sty|), copy that and rename it as to avoid
+license\footnote{The \LaTeX\ Public Project License requires
+renaming files when modifying them, see
+\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl}.} or naming conflicts. You
+might want to install the new style in your local \TeX\ tree to be
+able to access it from any place on your hard drive. See your
+\LaTeX\ distribution for more information.
+
+Once that has been taken care of, we can start creating the style.
+We strongly recommend to study a style file (for example,
+|powerdot-default.sty|) while reading the remainder of this section
+as it provides good examples for the content of this section.
+
+A style has several components. We describe these components below.
+\begin{description}
+\item\textbf{Identification and packages}\\
+This identifies the package in the log of a presentation and loads
+all required packages. The \pf{default} style contains something like:
+\begin{example}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ \ProvidesPackage{powerdot-default}[2005/10/09 v1.2 default style (HA)]
+ \RequirePackage{pifont}
+\end{example}
+See for more information about these commands a \LaTeX\ manual, for
+instance \cite{companion}.
+\item\textbf{Palette or color definitions}\\
+This section contains the definitions of palettes or colors that you
+want to use in the style. \pf{powerdot} uses \pf{xcolor} (via
+\pf{pstricks}). Hence, for more information about colors, see the
+\pf{xcolor} documentation. We will discuss palettes in more detail
+in section~\ref{sec:defpals}.
+\item\textbf{Template definitions}\\
+We will come back to this in sections~\ref{sec:deftemps}
+to~\ref{sec:defbg}.
+\item\textbf{Custom declarations}\\
+These can include anything that you want to be part of the style.
+The \pf{default} style, for instance, includes definitions for the labels
+in list environments like |itemize| and some initializations for
+lists in general (done with |\pdsetup|, see
+section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). This part could also include some
+customizations as described in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
+\item\textbf{Font initializations}\\
+This initializes font definitions (which can be done by
+loading a package like \pf{helvet}).
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Defining palettes}\label{sec:defpals}
+We will be defining templates formally in
+section~\ref{sec:deftemps}. For now, it's enough to have the general
+idea that a template controls the design of a slide. Palettes are
+sets of colors that color a template or design. A palette does not
+change the overall design of a template.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinepalettes}
+The following command can be used to define palettes for your style.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinepalettes}\marg{name1}\marg{cmds1}\dots'
+\end{command}
+This macro takes \emph{any} even number of mandatory arguments with
+a minimum of two. For every \meta{name}, a set of \meta{commands}
+can be given which define the palette with name \meta{name}. These
+commands can define colors with names |pdcolor1|, |pdcolor2|,
+etcetera. These colors can be used when designing the template (see
+section~\ref{sec:deftemps}). |pdcolor1| will always be used as text
+color.
+
+The user can access these palettes via the |palette| key for the
+|\pdsetup| command (see section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). If the user does
+not specify a palette, the first palette defined when compiling the
+presentation, will be used. Here is an example for defining 2
+palettes.
+\begin{example}
+ \pddefinepalettes{reds}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{1,0,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.2,0}
+ }{greens}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.1,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.2,1,0}
+ }
+\end{example}
+In this example, the |reds| palette is the default one. For more
+information about |\definecolor|, see the documentation of the
+\pf{xcolor} package \cite{xcolor}.
+
+Notice that it is not necessary to use the names |pdcolor2|,
+|pdcolor3| etcetera as color names. But if these colors are defined,
+\pf{powerdot} will use them, for instance, in the random dots
+feature (see section~\ref{sec:glopts}). The flexibility adds extra
+possibilities in setting up templates and palettes. See for an
+example of its use, the \pf{klope} style.
+
+\subsection{Defining templates}\label{sec:deftemps}
+We start off with a definition of what a template is. A template is
+a collection of settings for slide components together with custom
+definitions, which controls the visual appearance of a slide. A
+style can contain multiple templates.
+
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinetemplate}\oarg{basis}\marg{name}\marg{options}\marg{commands}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinetemplate}
+This defines the environment \meta{name} to produce a slide with
+characteristics determined by \meta{basis}, \meta{options} and
+\meta{commands}. We will discuss these elements in more detail
+in the coming sections.
+
+If you want to create several templates that differ only slightly
+from each other, define a \meta{basis} template, and then use it to
+define other templates. All \meta{options} and \meta{commands} for
+the new template \meta{name} will be appended to the existing list
+of \meta{options} and \meta{commands} from the \meta{basis}
+template.
+
+Make sure you choose a \emph{proper} name for the template, and
+avoid redefining existing templates or environments. \pf{powerdot}
+defines |pauseslide|, |note| and |emptyslide| internally, so you
+shouldn't use these names unless you know what you're doing.
+Furthermore, each style needs to define at least the templates
+|slide| and |titleslide|. The |titleslide| environment will be used
+to create the title slide and |slide| will (by default) also be used
+to create section slides. Titles and sections are a bit special in
+the way they use the \meta{options} and will be discussed in more
+detail in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
+
+\subsection{Controlling setup}
+\DescribeOption{ifsetup}
+The \meta{options} (keys) are described in the following sections.
+You can control how these options apply to the various setups by
+using the |ifsetup| key. Any key appearing before the first
+|ifsetup| declaration in \meta{options} will apply to every possible
+setup. Once the |ifsetup| key is used, then all subsequent key
+declarations will apply \textit{only} to the setups declared in the
+|ifsetup| key. The |ifsetup| key can be used multiple times.
+
+By possible setups, we mean the allowed values of the |mode|,
+|paper|, |orient|, and |display| keys that are described in
+section~\ref{sec:classopts}. If a value (or values!) for any of
+these four keys is not specified in a |ifsetup| declaration, then
+all subsequent key declarations will apply to any layout of that
+type. Consider the following as an example.
+\begin{example}[numbers=left,numberstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,
+ escapeinside=`',numbersep=1em,xleftmargin=1em]
+ ...
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.3\slideheight},
+ ifsetup={portrait,screen},
+ textpos={.3\slidewidth,.2\slideheight}
+ ...
+ ifsetup=landscape,
+ ...
+ ifsetup,
+ ...
+\end{example}
+Assuming there was no |ifsetup| declaration before the first
+|textpos| declaration, this first |textpos| will apply to every
+possible setup. However, for the screen format in portrait
+orientation, the next |textpos| declaration will be used. In fact,
+all declarations that appear until we switch to the next |ifsetup|
+(which specifies all paper sorts and only landscape orientation)
+will be used in the portrait screen layout. All keys after the next
+|ifsetup| declaration will be used in landscape orientation,
+\emph{with any paper, mode and display}. If, after declaring some
+specializations, you want to switch back to settings that apply to
+all possible setups, set |ifsetup| to empty as is done in the
+example. All subsequent declarations will then again be applied
+under any setup.
+
+The following command is a stand-alone implementation of the
+mechanism described above. It allows you to control the setup
+outside the \meta{options} argument of the |\pddefinetemplate|
+command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pdifsetup}\marg{desired}\marg{true}\marg{false}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pdifsetup}
+This macro executes \meta{true} when the setup that the user chose
+matches with the \meta{desired} setup, \meta{false} in all other cases.
+For instance, if the user has chosen landscape, then
+\begin{example}
+ \pdifsetup{landscape}{yes}{no}
+\end{example}
+will typeset |yes|. If the user would have chosen portrait instead,
+then |no| would have been typeset.
+
+This macro can be used to check setup requests from the user and,
+for instance, generate an error if a certain setup is not supported
+by your style. \pf{powerdot} provides one predefined error message
+which can be used in one of the first lines of your style.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pd@noportrait}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@noportrait}
+This macro generates an error when the user requests portrait
+orientation. Notice that the handout mode only works in portrait
+orientation. This macro takes that into account and doesn't generate
+an error in the case that the user requested a handout.
+
+\subsection{Main components}\label{sec:maincomps}
+The \meta{options} control several key components of a slide. Every
+component has several properties. A key that can be used in the
+\meta{options} argument is the name of the component postfixed by
+its property that you want to control.
+
+The components |title|, |text|, |toc|, |stoc| and |ntoc| have
+properties |hook|, |pos|, |width| and |font|. Additionally, the
+|text| component has a |height| property. The components |lf|, |cf| and
+|rf| have properties |hook|, |pos|, |temp| and |font|. Hence,
+examples of valid keys are |titlefont|, |tocpos| and |lftemp|. All
+components and properties will be discussed below.
+
+Here is an overview of the components that can be controlled from
+the \meta{options} argument in |\pddefinetemplate|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{title-}\option{title-}\\
+The slide title.
+\item\DescribeOption{text-}\option{text-}\\
+The main text box on the slide.
+\item\DescribeOption{toc-}\option{toc-}\\
+The (full) table of contents on a slide containing sections and
+slides.
+\item\DescribeOption{stoc-}\option{stoc-}\\
+This is a table of contents containing only the sections. See also
+|ntoc| below.
+\item\DescribeOption{ntoc-}\option{ntoc-}\\
+This is a table of contents containing only the entries for the
+active section. Together with |stoc|, this can be used to create a
+split table of contents. In a particular template, one would usually
+have a |toc|, a combination of |stoc| and |ntoc| or no table of
+contents at all.
+\item\DescribeOptions{lf-,cf-,rf-}\option{lf-,cf-,rf-}\\
+The left, center and right footers.
+\end{description}
+
+Notice that all positioning of components described above will be
+done with |\rput| from \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}
+internally. See the \pf{pstricks} documentation for more information
+about this command. It should also be noted that all components
+(except |lf|, |cf| and |rf|) put their content in a |minipage|
+environment.
+
+Now we list all properties of the components listed above and
+describe what they mean. Remember that keys are formed by combining
+a component name and a property.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{-hook}\option{-hook}\\
+This option defines the |\rput| hook that will be used when
+positioning the item. This can be |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
+|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B| and |c|. See the \pf{pstricks}
+documentation for more information.
+\item\DescribeOption{-pos}\option{-pos}\\
+This defines the position of the |hook| on the paper. The lower left
+corner of the paper is given by the point |{0,0}| and the upper right
+corner by the point |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|. So if you want to
+position the main text box at 20\% from the left edge and 30\% from
+the top edge of the paper, you have to do the following.
+\begin{example}
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.7\slideheight}
+\end{example}
+If the position of any component has not been specified, this
+component will not be placed on the slide. This gives an opportunity
+to design slides without footers or table of contents, for instance.
+\item\DescribeOption{-width}\option{-width}\\
+The width of the component. All component positioned by
+\pf{powerdot} will be put in a surrounding |minipage| environment.
+The |width| property determines the width of the |minipage|. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ textwidth=.7\slidewidth
+\end{example}
+This property does not exist for the |lf|, |cf| and |rf| components.
+\item\DescribeOption{-height}\option{-height}\\
+This option is only available for the |text| component. In other
+words, for this property, there is only one key, namely
+|textheight|. This can be used to specify the height of the
+|minipage| used for the main text. This does not imply that users
+are restricted to this length or that \pf{powerdot} does automatic
+slide breaking. This height is only used for vertical alignments of
+material, for instance by footnotes. The preset value is
+|\slideheight|.
+\item\DescribeOption{-font}\option{-font}\\
+This will be inserted just before the text that is about to be
+typeset. This can be used to declare deviations from the main text
+font and color. It can be a font declaration, like
+|\large\bfseries|, but can also contain other things like
+|\color{red}| or |\raggedright|.
+\item\DescribeOption{-temp}\option{-temp}\\
+This property is only available for the footers (|lf|, |cf| and |rf|) and
+can be used to change the template of the footers. This means that
+you can, for instance, add content to the footer, besides the
+content specified by the user. The default declaration by
+\pf{powerdot} is the following.
+\begin{example}
+ rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty
+ \else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide
+\end{example}
+Here |\pd@@rf| will contain the content of the right footer defined
+by the user via the |\pdsetup| command. Similarly, |\pd@@lf|
+contains the content of the left footer. The above declaration
+checks whether the footer and |\theslide| are both non-empty and if
+so, it inserts | -- | to separate both.
+\item\DescribeOption{-orient}\option{-orient}\\
+This property is only available for the |toc|, |stoc| and |ntoc|
+components. This property can be |h| or |v| and determines the
+orientation of the table of contents. The preset is |v|. See
+also section~\ref{sec:slidetoc} for more information about the
+construction of the table of contents.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Slide toc}\label{sec:slidetoc}
+The small table of contents that is placed on slides can be
+controlled by four macros and several options.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocsection}
+These macros take one argument. When building the table of contents,
+\pf{powerdot} first passes the content through |\pd@tocslide| or
+|\pd@tocsection|, depending on the type of entry that it is building
+at that moment. You could, for instance, do
+\begin{example}
+ \def\pd@tocslide#1{$\bullet$\ #1}
+ \def\pd@tocsection#1{#1}
+\end{example}
+which will prefix all normal entries (not the sections) with a
+bullet. By default, these two macros are defined to just pass on
+their argument.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocdisplay}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tochighlight}
+These two macros also take one argument. After processing an entry
+with the command |\pd@tocslide| or |\pd@tocsection|, \pf{powerdot}
+continues building the entry by passing it through |\pd@tocdisplay|,
+when the entry needs to be displayed only, or |\pd@tochighlight|,
+when the entry needs to be highlighted. These macros are a little
+more involved and take care of putting the content in the proper
+font and color in a |minipage|. Further, |\pd@tochighlight| also
+puts a box around the item.
+
+Notice, that by default, both the separate table of contents entries
+as well as the table of contents as a whole are typeset in
+|minipage| environments by these macros, in case the table of
+contents is vertical. The |-width| properties then determines the
+width of the table of contents and, together with |tocsecindent| and
+|tocslideindent| (see below) the width of the individual entries. If
+it is horizontal, only the separate entries will be in |minipage|s
+and the table of contents itself not and the |-width| properties
+determine only the width of the individual entries (together with
+|tocsecindent| and |tocslideindent|).
+
+Several aspects of the process of generating the table of contents
+can be controlled via the keys that are available in the
+|\pddefinetemplate| command that will be described below. If these
+keys do not provide enough handles to do what you want, you might
+need to have a look at the two macros in the source and decide to
+rewrite them in your style as to fit your needs. An example can be
+found in the \pf{fyma} style.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{tocfrsep}\option{tocfrsep}\\
+This length is the distance between the box around the content
+created by the |minipage| and the highlight frame box created by
+|\pd@tochighlight|. Preset: |0.5mm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecsep}\option{tocsecsep}\\
+The distance inserted before a section (unless it is the
+first element in the table of contents). Preset: |2ex|.
+Notice that if the orientation of the table of contents is set to
+vertical, this length creates a vertical skip, otherwise, it creates
+a horizontal skip.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocslidesep}\option{tocslidesep}\\
+The distance inserted before other entries (unless it is the
+first element in the table of contents). Preset: |0ex|. Like
+|tocsecsep|, the effect of this length depends on the orientation of
+the table of contents.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecindent}\option{tocsecindent}\\
+The horizontal space left to a section entry. Preset: |0pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocslideindent}\option{tocslideindent}\\
+The horizontal space left to a slide entry. The horizontal skip will
+not be inserted left to slide entries that appear before the first
+section. Preset: |0pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecm}\option{tocsecm}\\
+This is inserted just before typesetting a section. This can be used
+to mark a section, for instance with a line as in the \pf{default}
+style. Preset: empty.
+\item\DescribeOption{toctcolor}\option{toctcolor}\\
+This is the text color used for non-highlighted elements in the
+table of contents. Preset: |black|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tochltcolor}\option{tochltcolor}\\
+This is the text color used for highlighted elements in the table of
+contents. Preset: |white|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tochlcolor}\option{tochlcolor}\\
+This is the color used for the frame behind highlighted elements.
+Preset: |black|.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Miscellaneous options}\label{sec:miscoptions}
+There are some options that fall outside of the scope of the previous
+sections. These will be discussed here.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{iacolor}\option{iacolor}\\
+The |iacolor| option can be used to specify the color that is used
+for inactive things, produced for instance by |\onslide|, |\pause|
+(see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and |\tableofcontents| (see
+section~\ref{sec:tableofcontents}). As \pf{xcolor} is used by
+\pf{powerdot}, one can use special notation here, like
+\begin{example}
+ iacolor=black!20
+\end{example}
+The preset value for this key is |lightgray|.
+\end{description}
+
+The following options control the digital clock (see
+section~\ref{sec:classopts}). The clock is a form text field with
+dynamic content, driven by a javascript via \pf{hyperref} text
+fields. Some options for the clock work similarly as for, for
+instance, the title component, but there are also special options.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOptions{clockhook,clockpos}\option{clockhook,clockpos}\\
+These work in the same way as the |-hook| and |-pos| properties
+discussed in section~\ref{sec:maincomps}. The preset value of
+|clockhook| is |tr|.
+\item\DescribeOptions{clockwidth,clockheight}\option{clockwidth,clockheight}\\
+These control the width and height of the text field containing the
+clock. Preset values come from \pf{hyperref} and are |3cm| and
+|\baselineskip|, respectively.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockcharsize}\option{clockcharsize}\\
+The size of characters of the clock. Preset: |14pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockalign}\option{clockalign}\\
+The alignment of the clock in the text field. |0| is left-aligned,
+|1| is centered and |2| is right aligned. Preset is |2|.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockcolor}\option{clockcolor}\\
+This determines the text color of the clock. The value should be a
+named color. The preset value is |black|.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Template presets}
+Below, we have copied the preset setting for the keys described
+above. These will be used if you didn't supply other input for these
+keys in a particular template. If the preset value meets your
+needs, you don't have to specify it again in your style.
+\begin{example}
+ titlehook=Bl,titlepos=,titlewidth=\slidewidth,
+ titlefont=\raggedright,texthook=tl,textpos=,
+ textwidth=\slidewidth,textfont=\raggedright,
+ textheight=\slideheight,
+ tochook=tl,tocpos=,tocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ stochook=tl,stocpos=,stocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ stocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ ntochook=tl,ntocpos=,ntocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ tocorient=v,stocorient=v,ntocorient=v,
+ tocfrsep=.5mm,tocsecsep=2ex,tocslidesep=0ex,
+ tocsecm=,toctcolor=black,tochlcolor=black,tochltcolor=white,
+ tocsecindent=0pt,tocslideindent=0pt,
+ lfhook=Bl,lfpos=,lffont=\scriptsize,lftemp=\pd@@lf,
+ cfhook=B,cfpos=,cffont=\scriptsize,cftemp=\pd@@cf,
+ rfhook=Br,rfpos=,rffont=\scriptsize,rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf
+ \@empty\else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide,
+ iacolor=lightgray,
+ clockhook=tr,clockpos=,clockwidth=3cm,clockheight=\baselineskip,
+ clockcharsize=14pt,clockalign=2,clockcolor=black
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{The background}\label{sec:defbg}
+This leaves only one argument of the |\pddefinetemplate| macro
+undiscussed. This is the \meta{commands} argument. This argument can
+contain any code that you want to execute \textit{after} setting the
+options and \textit{before} building the slide components like the
+slide title, main text, and footers. This argument is designed to
+contain declarations that will build the background of a template
+using, for instance, \pf{pstricks}, but it can also hold other
+commands you might need for building your template.
+
+Important to notice is that these commands may not create \TeX\
+material as that might destroy the construction of the slide. So, if
+you want to place the word `Hello' in the bottom left corner of the
+slide, don't type `Hello', but make its width, height and depth
+equal to zero, for instance by using \pf{pstricks}' |\rput|.
+\begin{example}
+ \rput[bl](0,0){Hello}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Title slide, titles and sections}\label{sec:specialtemps}
+As mentioned before, the style that you write needs to define at
+least the templates |slide| and |titleslide|. The latter treats some
+of the keys in a special way. Besides, a section slide is also done
+in a special way.
+
+The title slide (made with |\maketitle|) puts the title with
+author(s) and date in the main text box. This means that you have to
+supply a position for the main text box (|textpos|). It will use the
+main text font for the text (together with declarations in the
+|textfont| key) for the author(s) and the date. But it will use the
+declarations in |titlefont| for the title of the presentation. This
+is done so that title and author(s) form a coherent block and to
+make sure that long titles can push down the author(s) instead of
+overwriting it.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@slidetitle}
+The |\pd@slidetitle| macro is used to typeset the slide title on
+slides. This macro is comparable to for instance |\pd@tocslide|. The
+macro takes one argument which is the slide title in the right font
+and formatting. By default, this macro just passes on the content
+for typesetting, but you could redefine this macro so do something
+with its input prior to typesetting it. An example is in the
+\pf{fyma} style which underlines the title after putting it in a
+|minipage| to support multi line titles.
+
+\DescribeMacros{\pd@title,\pd@sectiontitle}
+These macros are similar to |\pd@slidetitle| and typeset the title
+on the title slide and the title on section slides respectively. By
+default, these also pass there argument (which is the presentation
+title or section title), but these can be redefined to do something
+with the input prior to typesetting it, just as |\pd@slidetitle|.
+
+\DescribeOptions{sectemp,widesectemp}
+The |\section| command uses (by default) the |slide| environment and
+puts the section title in the title box with font |titlefont|. If
+you want to change the default use of the |slide| environment for
+sections to, for instance, the |sectionslide| environment or any
+other especially designed section template, change the section
+template preset in your style, using
+\begin{example}
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide}
+\end{example}
+This means that if the user asks for |template=slide| in the
+|\section| command, the |sectionslide| environment will be used
+silently. To avoid surprises, |sectionslide| should preferably be
+based on the |slide| environment.
+
+A similar option is available in case the user asks for
+|template=wideslide|. One could for instance do the following.
+\begin{example}
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
+\end{example}
+Whenever the user requests a |wideslide| to be used for a
+|\section|, instead, the |sectionwideslide| environment will be
+used. Other input to the |template| key by the user does not get a
+special treatment.
+
+Notice that these keys are available in the |section| family of keys
+and that you cannot use them in the |\pddefinetemplate| command.
+
+\subsection{Testing the style}\label{sec:styletest}
+\pf{powerdot} has a test file that should test most of the style.
+This test file can be produced by running \LaTeX\ over
+|powerdot.dtx|. This generates |powerdot-styletest.tex| which will
+help you with the testing job. Feel free to contact us when you
+would like to contribute your style to \pf{powerdot}. See also
+section~\ref{sec:questions}.
+
+\section{Using \LyX\ for presentations}\label{sec:lyx}
+\LyX\ \cite{LyXWeb} is a WYSIWYM (What You See Is What You Mean)
+document processor based on \LaTeX. It supports standard \LaTeX\
+classes but needs special files, called layout files, in order to
+support non-standard classes such as \pf{powerdot}.
+
+To start using \LyX\ for \pf{powerdot} presentations, copy the
+layout file |powerdot.layout| to the \LyX\ layout directory. You can
+find this file in the doc tree of your \LaTeX\ installation:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find it there, download
+it from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. Once that is
+done, reconfigure \LyX\ (\texttt{Edit\LyXarrow Reconfigure} and
+restart \LyX\ afterwards). Now you can use the \pf{powerdot}
+document class as any other supported class. Go to
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} and select \texttt{powerdot
+presentation} as document class. For more information, see the \LyX\
+documentation, which is accessible from the |Help| menu.
+
+\subsection{How to use the layout}
+The \pf{powerdot} \LyX\ layout provides some environments\footnote{Don't
+confuse these with \LaTeX\ environments.} which can be used in \LyX.
+Some of these environments (for instance |Title| or |Itemize|) are
+natural to use since they exist also in the standard document
+classes such as \pf{article}. For more information on these standard
+environments, see the \LyX\ documentation.
+
+This section will explain how to use the \pf{powerdot} specific
+environments |Slide|, |WideSlide|, |EmptySlide| and |Note|. These
+environments correspond to the \pf{powerdot} environments |slide|,
+|emptyslide|, |wideslide| and |note|.
+
+We start with a simple example. The following \LaTeX\ code
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide title}
+ Slide content.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+can be obtained using the following \LyX\ environments. The right
+column represents the text typed into the \LyX\ window and the left
+column represents the environment applied to this text).
+\begin{example}
+ Slide Slide title
+ Standard Slide content.
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+Some remarks concerning this example.
+\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
+\item You can use the environment menu (under the menu bar, top-left
+corner) to change the environment applied to text.
+\item The slide title should be typed on the line of the |Slide|
+environment.
+\item |EndSlide| finishes the slide and its line is left blank.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In the \LyX\ window, the |Slide| environment (that is, the slide
+title) is displayed in magenta, the |WideSlide| style in green, the
+|EmptySlide| style in cyan and the |Note| style in red and hence
+these are easily identifiable.
+
+Here is another example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{First slide title}
+ The first slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{First note title}
+ The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ \end{note}
+ \begin{slide}{Second slide title}
+ The second slide.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+This can be done in \LyX\ in the following way.
+\begin{example}
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ Note First note title
+ Standard The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ Slide Second slide title
+ Standard The second slide.
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+This example demonstrates that it is often sufficient to insert the
+|EndSlide| style after the last slide or note only. Only when you
+want certain material not to be part of a slide, you need to finish
+the preceding slide manually using the |EndSlide| style. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ EndSlide
+ [ERT box with some material]
+ Slide Second slide title
+ ...
+\end{example}
+
+Options can be passed to slide environments by using
+\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the slide title.
+The following example uses the |direct| method (see
+section~\ref{sec:verbatim}) in the short title argument (delimited by
+square brackets) to allow for a |lstlisting| environment (defined by
+the \pf{listings} package) within the slide content.
+\begin{example}
+ Slide [method=direct]Example of LaTeX source code
+ Standard Here's the \HelloWorld command:
+ [ERT box:
+ \lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+ \newcommand{\HelloWorld}{Hello World!}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ ]
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+Note that you are not obliged to use a |verbatim| environment to
+type the |\HelloWord| text into the \LyX\ window because \LyX\
+directly supports standard verbatim.\footnote{\LyX\ translates
+special characters into their corresponding \LaTeX\ command. For
+instance, the backslash character is translated into
+\cs{textbackslash{}}. Resulting, the font is not the same as in true
+verbatim and you might want to change that via the
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Character} dialog.} Consequently, the use of
+the slide processing methods |direct| and |file| is not necessary
+when you need standard verbatim, but it is necessary when doing more
+advanced things, like in the example above.
+
+\subsection{Support of syntax}
+This section lists options, commands and environments that are
+supported through the \LyX\ interface directly, without using an ERT
+box (\TeX-mode).
+
+All class options (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}) are supported
+via the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog (|Layout| pane).
+Options for the |\pdsetup| command (see section~\ref{sec:setup})
+should be specified in the |Preamble| pane of the
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog.
+
+Table \ref{tab:lyxcommands} lists the \pf{powerdot} commands that
+are supported in \LyX.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\cs{title} & Use \texttt{Title} environment.\\
+\cs{author} & Use \texttt{Author} environment.\\
+\cs{date} & Use \texttt{Date} environment.\\
+\cs{maketitle} & Managed directly by \LyX.\\
+\cs{section} & Use the \texttt{Section} environment. Options to this
+command (see section~\ref{sec:section}) can be specified using
+\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the section title.\\
+\cs{tableofcontents} & Use \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Lists \&
+TOC\LyXarrow Table of contents}. You will need an ERT box if you
+want to use the optional argument, see below.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} commands in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxcommands}
+\end{table}
+Table \ref{tab:lyxenvs} lists the \pf{powerdot} environments that,
+besides the earlier discussed |slide|, |wideslide|, |note| and
+|emptyslide| environments, are supported in \LyX.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Environment & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{itemize} & Use \texttt{Itemize} and \texttt{ItemizeType1}
+environments. The latter will create a list with |type=1| (see
+section~\ref{sec:lists}).\\
+\texttt{enumerate} & Use \texttt{Enumerate} and
+\texttt{EnumerateType1} environments.\\
+\texttt{thebibliography} & Use \texttt{Bibliography} environment.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} environments in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxenvs}
+\end{table}
+Table \ref{tab:lyxERT} lists commands that can only be done by using
+an ERT box (via \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow TeX}).
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\cs{and} & Within \texttt{Author} environment.\\
+\cs{pause} & \\
+\cs{item} & An ERT box is only required for the optional argument,
+not mandatory for overlays specifications.\\
+\cs{onslide} & And the versions \cs{onslide+} and \cs{onslide*}.\\
+\cs{twocolumn} & \\
+\cs{tableofcontents} & Only when using the optional argument.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\pf{powerdot} commands needing an ERT box in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxERT}
+\end{table}
+Note that you may use the clipboard in order to repeat often used
+commands like |\pause|. Finally, table \ref{tab:lyxadd} lists
+additional commands and environments that are supported by the layout.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Env./Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{quote} & Use \texttt{Quote} environment.\\
+\texttt{quotation} & Use \texttt{Quotation} environment.\\
+\texttt{verse} & Use \texttt{Verse} environment.\\
+\cs{caption} & Use \texttt{Caption} environment within standard
+float environments.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Additional environments for \LyX}\label{tab:lyxadd}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Compiling with \LyX}
+First of all, make sure that you have also read
+section~\ref{sec:compiling}. Then, in order to get a proper
+PostScript or PDF file, you have to set your \LyX\ document
+properties depending on which paper and orientation you want. When
+your \LyX\ document is open, go to the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow
+Document} dialog. In the \texttt{Layout} pane, put the |nopsheader|,
+|orient| and |paper| keys as class options (see
+section~\ref{sec:classopts} for a description). Then, go to the
+|Paper| pane and select corresponding paper size and orientation
+(you may choose |letter| paper in the case you set |paper=screen| in
+the class options). Finally, go to the |View| (or
+\texttt{File\LyXarrow Export}) menu and select your output
+(PostScript or PDF).
+
+\subsection{Extending the layout}
+If you have created a custom style (see section~\ref{sec:writestyle})
+which defines custom templates, you may want to extend the layout
+file\footnote{The LPPL dictates to rename a file if you modify it as
+to avoid confusion.} so that these templates are also supported in
+\LyX. The explanation below assumes that you have defined a template
+called |sunnyslide|.
+
+To support this new template in \LyX, you have to use the following
+command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinelyxtemplate}\meta{cs}\marg{template}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinelyxtemplate}
+This will define the control sequence \meta{cs} such that it will
+create a slide with template \meta{template} (which has been defined
+using |\pddefinetemplate|. This new control sequence can be used in
+the layout file as follows.
+\begin{example}
+ # SunnySlide environment definition
+ Style SunnySlide
+ CopyStyle Slide
+ LatexName lyxend\lyxsunnyslide
+ Font
+ Color Yellow
+ EndFont
+ Preamble
+ \pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxsunnyslide{sunnyslide}
+ EndPreamble
+ End
+\end{example}
+Note that you must begin the |LatexName| field with |lyxend|. The
+definition of the \LyX\ template has been inserted in between
+|Preamble| and |EndPreamble| which assures that the new \LyX\
+environment will work in every presentation. After modifying the
+layout file, don't forget to restart \LyX. See for more information
+about creating \LyX\ environments, the documentation of \LyX\ in the
+|Help| menu.
+
+\section{Questions}\label{sec:questions}
+\subsection{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{sec:FAQ}
+This section is devoted to Frequently Asked Questions. Please read
+it carefully; your problem might be solved by this section.
+\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt]
+\question
+Does \pf{powerdot} have example files? Where can I find them?
+\answer
+\pf{powerdot} comes with several examples that should be in the doc
+tree of your \LaTeX\ installation. More precisely:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find them there,
+download them from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}
+\cite{CTAN}.
+\question I'm getting errors or unexpected output when compiling
+the simplest example!
+\answer Did you read section~\ref{sec:compiling}?
+\question I made a typo in the slide code, ran the file, got an
+error, corrected the typo and reran, but now get an error that
+doesn't go away.
+\answer Remove the |.bm| and |.toc| files and try again.
+\question |\pause| does not work in the |align|\footnote{There are
+several environments doing similar things as \texttt{align}. Another
+example is the \texttt{split} environment, but more (often from the
+\pf{amsmath} package) can cause similar trouble for \cs{pause}.}
+environment.
+\answer |align| does several tricky things, which make it impossible
+to use |\pause|. Use |\onslide| instead. See
+section~\ref{sec:onslide}.
+\question My \pf{pstricks} nodes appear on all overlays. Also: color
+doesn't seem to work with |\onslide|.
+\answer Some PostScript tricks like nodes and color do not work with
+|\onslide|. Use |\onslide*| instead. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{pst-node}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Color}
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{A}}
+ This is {\onslide*{2-}{\color{red}} red} text.
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{B}}
+ \onslide{2}{\ncline{A}{B}}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+\question Do I need to edit style files to change a style a bit?
+\answer No, you do not need to edit any style file. You can change
+any part of a certain style using the |\pddefinetemplate| and
+|\pddefinepalettes| commands. Here is an example that removes the
+left and right footers from the \pf{default} style, places the slide
+number in the center footer and adds another palette.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{
+ lfpos=,rfpos=,cftemp=\theslide
+ }{}
+ \pddefinepalettes{mypalette}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.27,.31,.44}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.85,.85,.92}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.8,.75,.98}
+ }
+ \pdsetup{palette=mypalette}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Title}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+See section~\ref{sec:writestyle} for more information about these
+two commands.
+\question Can I contribute to this project?
+\answer
+Certainly. If you find bugs\footnote{Make sure that you confirm that
+the bug is really caused by \pf{powerdot} and not by another package
+that you use.} or typos, please send a message to the mailinglist
+(see section~\ref{sec:mailinglist}). If you have developed your own
+style that is distinct from existing styles and would like to see it
+included in \pf{powerdot}, please inform us by private e-mail and we
+will consider your contribution. Notice that included contributions
+will fall under the overall \pf{powerdot} license and copyright
+notice, but that your name will be included in the documentation
+when you make a contribution. This is done to guarantee that we can
+adapt files if maintenance is needed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+If your question has not been answered at this point, advance to the
+next section to read where to find more answers.
+
+\subsection{Mailinglist}\label{sec:mailinglist}
+\pf{powerdot} has a mailinglist from \url{freelists.org} and has its
+website here:
+\begin{center}
+\url{http://www.freelists.org/list/powerdot}
+\end{center}
+There is a link to `List Archive'. Please search this archive before
+posting a question. Your problem might already have been solved in
+the past.
+
+If that is not the case, use the box on the page to type your e-mail
+address, choose the action `Subscribe' and click `Go!'. Then follow
+the instructions that arrive to you by e-mail. At a certain moment,
+you can login for the first time using an authorization code sent to
+you by e-mail. After logging in, you can create a password for
+future sessions using the `Main Menu' button. The other buttons
+provide you some info and options for your account.
+
+When you are all set, you can write to the list by sending an e-mail
+to
+\begin{center}
+\url{powerdot [at] freelists [dot] org}
+\end{center}
+
+When writing to the list, please keep in mind the following very
+important issues.
+\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
+\item We are volunteers!
+\item Keep your questions related to \pf{powerdot}.
+\item Always supply a \emph{minimal} example demonstrating your
+problem.
+\item Don't send big files over the list.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+We hope you will enjoy this service.
+
+\section{Source code documentation}\label{sec:source}
+In case you want regenerate the package files from the source or
+want to have a look at the source code description, locate
+|powerdot.dtx|, search in the file for |\OnlyDescription| and remove
+that and do
+\begin{example}
+ latex powerdot.tex
+ latex powerdot.tex
+ bibtex powerdot
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
+ latex powerdot.tex
+ latex powerdot.tex
+\end{example}
+
+
+\section{Implementation}\label{sec:imple}
+\subsection{General construction}
+This section explains the general idea of the class, how paper
+dimensions are chosen and how slides are created. We start with the
+paper.
+
+This class uses the same idea as \pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper},
+namely that we create a background with \pf{pstricks} and position
+text on it using |\rput| and some |minipage| environments. This is
+easier than writing a dedicated output routine that can handle all
+the material, but doesn't break pages when we don't want that. So,
+when starting to write the class, we first investigated how to deal
+with landscape slides and paper dimensions.
+
+The job of making landscape slides can be done using \pf{geometry}.
+The paper dimension was more of a problem. As \LaTeX\ doesn't have
+the huge fonts that we need for presentations, we need to scale the
+usual fonts somehow. This could be done by using unusual paper
+dimensions (as \pf{beamer} does) and hence relying on ps2pdf to cut
+off all the redundant material. But this doesn't produce a usable
+DVI or PS file. Instead, it was chosen to use DVI magnification. The
+entire slide is magnified by a factor of 2 and only the top left
+quarter of the paper is used (but you will never notice that due to
+the magnification). As we already decided to place all material in
+|minipage|s using |\rput|, we didn't need the page anymore and it
+was easiest to use \pf{geometry} to just remove the page margins
+altogether so that the bottom left corner would be |(0,0)| and the
+top right corner |(\slidewidth,\slideheight)|.
+
+One extra remark on the paper type is necessary. We found that most
+common configurations of dvips use the |A4size| code when A4
+dimensions are found. This code doesn't write an explicit PostScript
+paper command in the PS document and hence programs using this PS
+(like ps2pdf) don't know what paper to use and revert to the
+default, which is letter paper in most cases. This, of course, is
+something that we don't want and hence, \pf{powerdot} will write
+these commands to the PS itself as to guarantee proper post
+processing of the PS.
+
+Now that we made the decisions on how to create proper DVI, PS and
+PDF output, the next task was to create an easy interface to
+overlays. To avoid counting the overlays as is necessary with
+\pf{prosper}, we implemented a system that first collects the entire
+body of an environment in a macro which can be reused multiple
+times. During execution of the body, the overlay commands like
+|\onslide| will keep a record of the biggest number that they find
+and that is the number of overlays to produce. Getting the body of
+the environment is done by collecting all material up to the next
+|\end| occurrence. If that control sequence has the proper argument
+(namely the slide that we started with), then we stop scanning and
+start processing the slide. With normal use, you will not notice
+this, but when doing special tricks like hiding |\end{slide}| in a
+macro, the process will fail as it relies on finding |\end{slide}|
+in the input stream without doing expansions. Often a work around
+can be found though. Have a look for instance at how |\section|
+creates a slide.
+
+The next task was to provide a simple way to create templates. As
+the class is based on the idea of having a background with some
+material spread out over it, the template system follows this idea.
+One argument can be used to create the background, the other
+argument controls, via keys and options, several properties of the
+material that should be placed. By adding an |ifsetup| key, full
+control could be gained over the design of the template in every
+possible setup chosen by the user.
+
+The final task for the class was to fill in all the `details'. All
+the mechanisms were present, but sometimes they should not be
+active. For instance, overlays should not be created in handout
+mode. Other things to add to the class were counter protection on
+overlays, handles to the layout of the slide number, footnotes, a
+bibliography environment, empty slides, etcetera.
+
+We hope that this section has made clear a little bit what you will
+be seeing when reading the next section with coding and why we chose
+to do it this way.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{powerdot}
+
+\section*{Acknowledgements}
+The authors are grateful to Mael Hill\'ereau for contributing the
+\LyX\ layout file and description. Further, we like to thank all
+style contributors (see section~\ref{sec:styles}). Moreover, we wish
+to thank everyone who contributed to this package in any other
+way.\\[1em]
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
+Ramon van den Akker, Pavel \v C\'i\v zek, Darren Dale, Hans Marius
+Eikseth, Morten H\o gholm, Andr\'as Horv\'ath, Laurent Jacques, Akira
+Kakuto, Uwe Kern, Kyanh, Theo Stewart, Don P. Story and Herbert Vo\ss.
+\end{minipage}
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}\\[1em]
+We hope not to have forgotten anyone.
+
+\PrintChangesX\PrintIndexX
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c464ea3779c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d2e8372dbf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotDE.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2889 @@
+\batchmode
+\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,ngerman]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{babel}
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex}
+
+\usepackage{dcolumn,dtklogos,multicol,fancyvrb,graphicx,url,varioref,latexsym}
+\usepackage[table]{xcolor}
+\usepackage{pstricks}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\def\slash#1{\textbackslash{\tt #1}}
+\def\pf#1{\texttt#1}
+
+ \title{{\bf The} \texttt{powerdot} {\bf class} vl.3 (2005/12/06)}
+
+ \author{Hendri Adriaens and Christopher
+ Ellison\footnote{"Ubersetzung: Lennart Petersen, Christiane Matthieu, Christoph
+ K"ohler, Julia Babigian, Christine R"omer (Institut für Germanistische
+ Sprachwissenschaft der Friedrich-Schiller-Universität Jena), 1.\,"Ubersetzungsversion,
+ letzte "Anderung 21.\,4. 2009}}
+
+
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{footnotesize}
+\begin{abstract}
+\pf{Powerdot} ist eine Präsentationsklasse für \LaTeX\, welche die
+schnelle und einfache Entwicklung von professionellen Präsentationen
+erlaubt. Sie enthält viele Möglichkeiten, die Präsentation zu verbessern
+und den Präsentierenden zu unterstützten, beispielsweise automatische
+Overlays, das Einfügen persönlicher Anmerkungen und einen Handout-Modus.
+DVI, PS und PDF sind mögliche Ausgabeformate, um die Präsentation
+anzuzeigen. Ein leistungsstarkes template-System erlaubt das einfache
+Entwickeln neuer Stile. Eine \LyX -Layoutdatei ist enthalten.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\end{footnotesize}
+
+\section{Einführung}\label{sec:intro}
+Mithilfe dieser Klasse ist es möglich, professionell aussehende
+Folien herzustellen. Die Klasse wurde so entworfen, dass die Entwicklung
+von Präsentationen möglichst einfach gehalten ist, sodass man sich auf
+den eigentlichen Inhalt der Präsentation konzentrieren kann, anstatt sich
+mit technischen Details befassen zu müssen. Nichtsdestoweniger sind
+grundlegende \LaTeX\ -Kenntnisse für die Nutzung von Powerdot notwendig.
+
+Diese Klasse baut auf die \pf{prosper}-Klasse \cite{prosper} und das
+\pf{HA-prosper}-Paket \cite{HA-prosper} auf und erweitert diese. Das
+\pf{HA-prosper}-Paket war anfangs dafür gedacht, \pf{prosper} zu erweitern
+und einige Fehler und Probleme dieser Klasse zu korrigieren. Beim Voranschreiten
+der Entwicklung des \pf{HA-prosper}-Paketes bemerkte man, dass nicht alle
+Probleme auf diese Weise gelöst werden konnten. Diese Entdeckung war der
+Beginn eines neuen Projektes, aus dem eine neue Klasse hervorgehen sollte,
+welche die sonst nötige Kombination von \pf{prosper} und \pf{HA-prosper}
+ersetzen konnte. Die \pf{Powerdot}-Klasse ist das Ergebnis dieses Projektes.
+
+Der verbleibende Abschnitt dieses Kapitels sei nun einem Blick auf die
+Struktur einer \pf{Powerdot}präsentation gleichsam wie einem Überblick über die
+gesamte Dokumentation gewidmet.
+
+Der Aufbau einer Präsentation ist stets derselbe. Er ist im folgenden Beispiel
+nachvollziehbar.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass[<class options>]{powerdot}
+ \pdsetup{<presentation options>}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{a slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{first section}
+ \begin{slide}[<slide options>]{another slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{personal note}
+ The note.
+ \end{note}
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Einige dieser Elemente definieren die Struktur des Dokuments. Zuvorderst
+sind einige Optionen zum \slash{documentclass}-Befehl möglich, welche die Art
+der Ausgabe des Dokuments betreffen, beispielsweise das Papierformat.
+Diese Optionen werden in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:classopts} besprochen. Ferner
+gibt es Spezifikationsoptionen, die einige globale Elemente der Präsentation
+wie zum Beispiel Fußnoten kontrollieren. Sie werden in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:pdsetup}
+behandelt.
+
+Sind diese Entscheidungen getroffen, können die slide-Umgebung zum Erstellen
+von Folien (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:slides}) und die note-Umgebung zum
+Erstellen von Anmerkungen, die mit den Folien angezeigt werden (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:notes}), genutzt werden. Overlays ermöglichen, Inhalte
+nacheinander anzuzeigen, was in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:overlays} beschrieben wird.
+Der \slash{section} Befehl dient der Strukturierung der Präsentation. Dieses wird
+in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:structure} dargestellt. Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles} zeigt
+eine Übersicht über die Stile, die in dieser Klasse enthalten sind, und deren
+Charakteristiken. Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling} behandelt die Möglichkeiten
+der Ausgabe und beinhaltet damit wichtige Informationen bezüglich der für
+\pf{Powerdot} benötigten Pakete.
+
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:writestyle} ist am interessantesten für jene, die ihren
+eigenen Stil für \pf{Powerdot} entwickeln oder einen bestehenden modifizieren
+wollen. Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lyx} erklärt, wie \LyX\ \cite{LyXWeb} genutzt werden
+kann, um \pf{Powerdot}präsentationen zu erstellen. Das Ende der Dokumentation
+schließlich (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:questions}) wurde einem Kapitel über Fragen wie
+"`Wo kann ich Beispiele finden?"' gewidmet und enthält ferner die Informationen,
+wohin man sich wenden kann, wenn die eigenen Fragen zu \pf{Powerdot} noch nicht
+gelöst sein sollten.
+
+\section{Das Erstellen einer Präsentation}\label{sec:setup}
+
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt die möglichen Optionen zur Kontrolle der Ausgabe
+der Präsentationen und dem Erscheinungsbild eben jener.
+
+\subsection{documentclass-Optionen}\label{sec:classopts}
+
+Begonnen wird mit
+den Optionen, die in den \slash{documentclass} Befehl mittels einer durch Kommata
+separierten Liste eingefügt werden. Für jede Möglichkeit wird der
+Standardwert\footnote{Das ist der Wert, der als Standard genutzt wird, wenn
+nichts anderes explizit gewählt wird.} in der Beschreibung erwähnt. Das ist
+der Wert, der genutzt wird, wenn entschieden wurde, einer Option keinen Wert
+zu geben oder die Option gar nicht zu verwenden.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{mode}}
+Die Optionen \texttt{mode} bestimmen die Art der Ausgabe, die produziert werden soll.
+Der Standardwert ist \texttt{present}.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{mode=present}]
+
+Dieser Modus wird dazu genutzt, die eigentliche Präsentation zu erstellen.
+Er aktiviert Overlays und Ãœbergangseffekte. Auf Overlays wird in
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:overlays} näher eingegangen.
+
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{mode=print}]
+Dieser Modus kann verwendet werden, um die Folien inklusive ihrer visuellen
+Aufmachung, aber ohne Overlays oder Ãœbergangseffekte auszudrucken.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{mode=handout}]
+Dieser Modus erstellt einen schwarzweißen Überblick über die Folien, der
+genutzt werden kann, um persönliche Notizen darauf zu verzeichnen, die
+Präsentation an Studenten auszugeben, ihn als eigenen Leitfaden einzusetzen, etc.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{nopagebreaks}]
+Standardmäßig gibt der handout-Modus Dokumente mit zwei Folien pro Seite aus.
+Wenn mehr Folien pro Seite platziert werden sollen, füge man diese Option in den
+\slash{documentclass} Befehl ein und \pf{Powerdot} wird es \LaTeX\ überlassen, zu
+entscheiden, wann der Seitenumbruch stattfinden soll, meistens also, wenn eine
+Seite gefüllt ist.
+\end{description}
+\end{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{paper}}
+Die Option \texttt{paper} hat drei mögliche Werte.
+Der Standardwert ist \texttt{screen}.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{paper=screen}]
+Dies ist ein Spezialformat mit optimalem Bildschirmverhältnis (4/3). Die entsprechenden
+Seitenlängen sind 8.25 Inch zu 11 Inch (ungefähr 21cm zu 28cm). Dieses Papierformat ist für den
+print- oder
+handout-Modus nicht vorhanden. In diesen Modi wird \pf{Powerdot} automatisch zur Größe
+DIN A4 wechseln und eine Warnung diesbezüglich in die Logdatei der Präsentation schreiben.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{paper=a4paper}]
+Das Format DIN A4 wird für die Präsentation oder das Handout genutzt.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{paper=letterpaper}]
+Ein Briefpapierformat wird genutzt.
+\end{description}
+
+Einige wichtige Informationen zum Papierformat, zum Kompilieren und dem Betrachten von
+Präsentationen finden sich im Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{orient}}Die Option \texttt{orient} kontrolliert die
+Ausrichtung der Präsentation. Der
+Standardwert ist \texttt{landscape}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{orient=landscape}]
+Die Präsentation erhält das Querformat. Dieser Wert ist im handout-Modus nicht verfügbar.
+Sollte er dennoch gewählt werden, wird ihn \pf{Powerdot} zum Hochformat wechseln und einen
+entsprechend warnenden Vermerk in die Logdatei schreiben.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{orient=portrait}]
+Dies erstellt Folien im Hochformat. Es ist zu beachten,
+dass nicht alle Stile diese Ausrichtung unterstützen. In Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles} sind
+diesbezüglich entsprechende Informationen für jeden Stil zu finden.
+\end{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{display}} Die Option \texttt{display} beeinflusst die
+Produktion von Folien und Anmerkungen. Der
+Standardwert ist \texttt{slides}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{display=slides}]
+Dies wird nur die Folien in der Präsentation anzeigen.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{display=slidesnotes}]
+Dies wird sowohl die Folien als auch die Anmerkungen in der Präsentation anzeigen. Mehr
+Informationen bezüglich der Anmerkungen enthält Abschnitt~\ref{sec:notes}.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{display=notes}]
+Dies wird nur die Anmerkungen anzeigen.
+\end{description}
+
+Hier nun noch einige weitere Optionen, welche die Ausgabe beeinflussen.
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{size}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{size}]
+ist die Schriftgröße von normalem Text in Punkten (points).
+Mögliche Werte sind 8pt,
+9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt, 17pt und 20pt. Der Standardwert ist 11pt.\footnote{Es sollte
+beachtet werden, dass von 10pt, 11pt und 12pt abweichende Schriftgrößen keine Standardvarianten
+sind und man für diese das \pf{extsizes}-Paket \cite{extsizes}, welches diese Größen beinhaltet,
+installieren muss.}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{style}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{style}]
+definiert den Stil, der für
+die Präsentation geladen werden soll. Standardmäßig wird der
+\pf{default}-Stil geladen. Mögliche Varianten sind im Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles} zu finden.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{fleqn}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{fleqn}]
+setzt die Gleichungen linksbündig.
+Eben so, wie es die gleichnamige Option in der
+article-Klasse ebenfalls setzt.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{display}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{display}]
+setzt die Gleichungsnummern linksseitig.
+Auch hier wieder entsprechend der gleichnamigen
+Option in der article-Klasse.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{nopsheader}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{nopsheader}]
+Standardmäßig schreibt \pf{Powerdot} einen
+Postscriptbefehl in die PS-Datei, um sicherzugehen,
+dass die nachfolgenden Bearbeitungsprogramme wie ps2pdf wissen, welches Papierformat sie nutzen
+sollen, auch wenn keine explizite Spezifikation dazu in der Kommandozeile steht. Dazu ist
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling} zu beachten. Wenn Probleme mit den nachfolgenden
+Bearbeitungsprogrammen oder dem Ausdrucken auftreten, oder wenn man selbst das
+Papierformat in den nachfolgenden Bearbeitungsstufen definieren möchte, nutzt man
+diese Option.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{hlentries}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{hlentries}]
+Dies hebt Einträge des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
+hervor, wenn der Eintrag mit
+der aktuellen Folie übereinstimmt. Der Standardwert ist \texttt{true}. Man beachte
+dazu auch Abschnitt~\ref{sec:structure}. Wenn keine solchen Hervorhebungen
+gewünscht werden (beispielsweise im print-Modus), nutzt man
+\texttt{hlentries=false}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{hlsections}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{hlsections}]
+Dies hebt die Abschnitte (sections) des
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses hervor, wenn
+diese mit den Abschnitten der laufenden Präsentation übereinstimmen. Der
+Standardwert ist \texttt{false}. Dazu ist ebenfalls Abschnitt~\ref{sec:structure}
+zu beachten. Eine Spezifikation dieser Option wendet die Hervorhebung der
+Abschnitte an. Dies kann hilfreich sein, wenn man einen Stil nutzt, der ein
+geteiltes Inhaltsverzeichnis enthält.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{balckslide}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{blackslide}]
+Diese Option fügt eine schwarze Folie auf der
+ersten Seite der Präsentation
+ein und wird ferner automatisch zur zweiten Seite wechseln, wenn die
+Präsentation in einem PDF-Viewer wie dem Acrobat Reader geöffnet wird.
+Ferner fügt diese Option einen Verweis zu jeder Folien- oder Abschnittsüberschrift
+ein, der zurück auf die schwarze Folie führt. Klickt man dann dagegen irgendwo
+auf die schwarze Folie, kommt man zurück zu jener Folie, auf der man sich
+zuvor befand. Diese Option kann dazu genutzt werden, eine Präsentation
+temporär zu pausieren, wenn man beispielsweise einen Beweis an der Tafel
+anführen möchte.
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clock}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clock}]
+Dies zeigt eine kleine Digitaluhr auf den Folien,
+die dafür genutzt werden
+kann, die Zeit während des Vortrages im Auge zu behalten.
+\end{description}
+
+Hier ist ein Beispiel für einen \slash{documentclass} Befehl.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=screen,
+ mode=present,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nopagebreaks,
+ blackslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieses Beispiel definiert eine Präsentation im \pf{tycja}-Stil, mit schwarzer
+Folie, einer Schriftgröße von 12 Punkten und linksbündigen Gleichungen.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=letterpaper,
+ mode=handout,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nopagebreaks,
+ blackslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Mit dem Wechsel der \texttt{paper}- und \texttt{mode}-Optionen wird nun ein Handout mit mehr
+als zwei Folien pro Seite, ganz so, wie es die \texttt{nopagebreaks}-Option definiert,
+ausgegeben.
+
+\subsection{Setup Optionen}\label{sec:pdsetup}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{$\backslash$pdsetup}}
+Es gibt einige Zusatzoptionen, die dabei helfen, eine Präsentation den eigenen
+Wünschen anzupassen. Diese Optionen sind allerdings nicht im
+\slash{documentclass} Befehl
+enthalten, was technisch begründet ist.\footnote{Der interessierte Leser wende
+sich dazu an den Abschnitt bezüglich des \pf{xkvltxp}-Paketes in der
+\pf{xkeyval}-Dokumentation \cite{xkeyval}.}
+Wir unterscheiden zwei Arten von Optionen. Jene Optionen, die nur global, also
+die gesamte Präsentation betreffend, mittels des \slash{pdsetup} Befehls definiert
+werden können, und jene Optionen, die sowohl global (mittels
+\slash{pdsetup}) als
+auch lokal (mittels Folienumgebungen, mehr dazu in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:slides})
+nutzbar sind.
+
+\subsubsection{Globale Optionen}\label{sec:gopts}
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt Optionen, die einzig global in der Präambel der
+Präsentation mittels des \slash{pdsetup} Befehls genutzt werden können.
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{palette}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{palette}]
+Dies definiert die nutzbare Farbpalette. Eine Farbpalette
+ist eine Sammlung
+von Farben, die von einem Stil bereitgestellt wird. Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles}
+erläutert genau, welche Stile welche Farbpaletten enthalten.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lf}\\\texttt{rf}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lf} \fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{rf}]
+Dies definiert den Inhalt der linken und der rechten Fußzeile. Sie sind
+standardmäßig leer.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{theslide}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{theslide}]
+
+Diese Option legt fest, wie die Foliennummern auf der
+Folie gesetzt werden. Der Standardwert ist
+\slash{arabic}\{slide\}$\sim$/$\sim$\slash{pageref*\{lastslide\}},
+was in der Form
+\texttt{5/22} dargestellt wird. Man beachte, dass der
+Befehlszeilenabschnitt \slash{arabic\{slide\}}
+die Nummer der gerade angezeigten Folie und der Befehlszeilenabschnitt
+\slash{pageref*\{lastslide\}} die Nummer der letzten Folie anzeigt.\footnote{Es wird
+\slash{pageref} mit Stern verwendet, was mittels \slash{hyperref}
+definiert wird und so keinen Verweis auf die Seite, auf die sich bezogen wird, erstellt.}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{thenote}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{thenote}]
+Dies ist gleich dem \texttt{theslide} Befehl, bezieht sich
+allerdings auf die
+Foliennummern der Anmerkungen. Der Standardwert ist\\
+\texttt{note$\sim$$\backslash$arabic\{note\}}\texttt{$\sim$of$\sim$slide$\sim$$\backslash$arabic\{slide\}},
+wobei hier\\ \slash{arabic\{note\}} die Nummer der aktuellen Anmerkung auf der aktuellen
+Folie zeigt. Dies könnte beispielsweise so aussehen: \texttt{note 2 of
+slide 7}. (Für eine deutsche Ausgabe wäre folgender Wert möglich:\\
+\texttt{Anmerkung$\sim$}\slash{arabic\{note\}}\texttt{$\sim$auf$\sim$Folie$\sim$}\slash{arabic\{slide\}},
+was folgendermaßen angezeigt werden würde: \texttt{Anmerkung 2 auf Folie 7}.)
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{counters}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{counters}]
+Die \texttt{counters} Option listet Zähler auf, die
+möglicherweise bei Overlays geschützt
+werden sollen. Da Inhalte sowie auch \LaTeX\ -Zähler bei Overlays (Man beachte
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:overlays}) mehrfach bearbeitet werden, wie es beispielsweise
+beim \texttt{equation} Zähler der Fall sein kann, ist es möglich, dass zu hohe Zählungen
+entstehen. Um zu vermeiden, dass die Zähler bei verschiedenen Overlays unterschiedliche
+Nummern anzeigen, nutzt man diese Option. Die \texttt{equation},
+\texttt{table}, \texttt{figure},
+\texttt{footnote} und \texttt{mpfootnote} Zähler sind bereits geschützt. Wenn man weitere
+Zähler benutzt, beispielsweise für Theoreme, sollte man diese mittels dieser
+Option auflisten. Zum Beispiel:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ counters={theorem,lemma}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{list}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{list}]
+Diese Option enthält eine ganze Liste von Optionen, die dem \pf{enumitem}-Paket
+angepasst sind, welches das Layout jener Listen, die mithilfe der
+\texttt{enumerate}
+und \texttt{itemize} Umgebungen erzeugt werden, definiert. Ein Beispiel:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Man beachte für mehr Informationen bezüglich des Layouts von Listen das
+\pf{enumitem}-Paket \cite{enumitem}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{enumerate}\\\texttt{itemize}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{enumerate} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{itemize}]
+
+Dies ist gleich der \texttt{list} Optionen, kontrolliert allerdings nur die
+\texttt{enumerate} bzw. \texttt{itemize} Umgebungen.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsubsection{Globale und lokale Optionen}\label{sec:glopts}
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt Optionen, die sowohl global mittels des
+\texttt{pdsetup} Befehls als auch lokal mittels Folienumgebungen (mehr dazu in
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:slides}) definiert werden können.
+
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{trans}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{trans}] Diese Option definiert, dass der Standardübergangseffekt für
+die Präsentation
+genutzt wird. Diese Ãœbergangseffekte werden erst nach der Kompilierung der
+Präsentation ins PDF-Format angezeigt. Man beachte dazu auch
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling}. Die folgenden Übergangseffekte werden unterstützt:
+\texttt{Split}, \texttt{Blinds}, \texttt{Box}, \texttt{Wipe},
+\texttt{Dissolve}, \texttt{Glitter} und \texttt{Replace}. Wenn mit
+einem PDF-Viewer gearbeitet wird, der PDF 1.5 anzeigen kann, sind ebenfalls
+\texttt{Fly},
+\texttt{Push}, \texttt{Cover}, \texttt{Uncover} oder \texttt{Fade} nutzbar. Es ist wichtig,
+zu beachten, dass
+die meisten PDF-Viewer technisch empfindlich sind, beispielsweise wird
+\texttt{box} nicht funktionieren.
+
+Der Standardeffekt ist \texttt{Replace}, welcher einzig eine Folie zur nächsten wechseln
+wird, wenn sie durchgesehen werden. Man beachte, dass manche PDF-Viewer (wie der
+Acrobat Reader 5 oder höher) die Übergangseffekte nur im Vollbildmodus anzeigen.
+Wenn ein bisher nicht aufgeführter Übergangseffekt (beispielsweise ein Wischeffekt
+mit einer speziellen Bewegungsrichtung) genutzt werden soll, ist das durchaus möglich.
+\pf{Powerdot} wird eine Warnung in die Logdatei schreiben, dass der ausgewählte
+Effekt möglicherweise nicht vom PDF-Viewer angezeigt werden wird. Hier ein
+Beispiel, das funktioniert:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ trans=Wipe /Di 0
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der Acrobat Reader zeigt diesen Wischeffekt von rechts nach links, statt, wie
+es der Standard ist, von oben nach unten. Für weitere Informationen sei das
+PDF-Referenzhandbuch empfohlen.
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\
+ \texttt{method}}
+
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{method}]
+Diese Option kann dann genutzt werden, wenn die Präsentation spezielles Material
+enthält, das nicht in der "`üblichen Art"' von \LaTeX\ behandelt werden soll.
+Verbatim-Material kann beispielhaft angeführt werden. Mögliche Werte sind
+\texttt{normal} (der Standardwert), \texttt{direct} und \texttt{file}. Diese Optionen werden
+genauer im Abschnitt~\ref{sec:verbatim} erklärt.
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{logohook}\\\texttt{logopos}\\\texttt{logocmd}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{logohook} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{logops} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{logocmd}]
+
+Wenn \texttt{logopos} spezifiziert wurde, wird ein Logo
+vom \texttt{logocmd}-Wert definiert
+und auf jede Folie gesetzt. Die Position des Logos kann in relativen Werten
+abhängig von der Breite und Höhe der Folien gesetzt werden. \{{0,0\} ist die
+untere linke Ecke des Papiers und
+\{\slash{slidewidth},\slash{slideheight}\} ist die obere
+rechte Ecke. Für die Positionierung des Logos wird der \slash{rput} Befehl von
+\pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} genutzt. Dieser Befehl erlaubt es
+ebenfalls, einen genauen Punkt als Logoposition zu definieren. Dieser Punkt
+kann mithilfe der \texttt{logohook}-Option eingetragen werden und die
+Werte \texttt{tl},
+\texttt{t}, \texttt{tr}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{Br}, \texttt{br},
+\texttt{b}, \texttt{bl}, \texttt{Bl}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{B} und
+\texttt{c} sind möglich.
+Weitere Informationen bezüglich des \slash{rput} Befehls enthält die
+\pf{pstricks}-Dokumentation. Hier ist ein Beispiel, in dem die Blume des
+\pf{default}-Stiles in den \pf{husky}-Stil integriert wird.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass[style=husky]{powerdot}
+ \pdsetup{
+ logohook=t,
+ logopos={.088\slidewidth,.99\slideheight},
+ logocmd={\includegraphics[height=.08\slideheight]
+ {powerdot-default.ps}}
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der Standardwert von \texttt{logohook} ist \texttt{tl}.
+\end{description}
+
+Eine besondere Eigenschaft von \pf{Powerdot}, mit deren Hilfe
+Präsentationen
+ein wenig Leben eingehaucht werden kann, ist die Nutzung von Zufallspunkten.
+Diese Punkte werden irgendwo auf den Folien gesetzt und nutzen die Farben
+der ausgewählten Farbpalette. Auch Overlays werden dieselben Punkte aufweisen.
+Diese Eigenschaft basiert auf \texttt{random.tex}~\cite{random}. Verschiedenste
+Optionen sind möglich, um das Erscheinen der Zufallspunkte zu kontrollieren.
+
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{randomdots}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{randomdots}]
+Standardmäßig sind die Zufallspunkte ausgeschaltet. Sie
+werden dann generiert,
+wenn diese Option mit dem Wert \texttt{true} versehen wird, während der
+Wert \texttt{false}
+sie wiederum ausschaltet. Wenn kein expliziter Wert zu dieser Option gesetzt
+ist, wird \texttt{true} angenommen.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{dmindots}\\\texttt{dmaxdots}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dmindots} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dmaxdots}]
+Die Anzahl der Punkte pro Folie ist ebenfalls zufällig. Diese Optionen legen
+die minimale und maximale Anzahl Punkte pro Folie fest. Die Standardwerte sind
+\texttt{5} bzw. \texttt{40}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{dminsize}\\\texttt{dmaxsize}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dminsize} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dmaxsize}]
+Dies ist der minimale und maximale Radius der Punkte. Standardwerte sind
+\texttt{5pt} bzw. \texttt{40pt}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{dminwidth}\\\texttt{dmaxwidth}\\\texttt{dminheight}\\
+\texttt{dmaxheight}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dminwidth} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dmaxwidth} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dminheight} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dmaxheight}]
+Diese Option bestimmt das Areal auf der Folie, in dem
+die Zufallspunkte erscheinen sollen. Der Standardwert dieser Option definiert, dass die
+Punkte überall auf der Folie erscheinen können, aber das ist variabel,
+beispielsweise so, dass die Punkte nur noch im Textfeld vorkommen. Die
+Standardwerte sind \texttt{0pt}, \slash{slidewidth}, \texttt{0pt},
+\slash{slideheight}.
+
+Hier ein Beispiel, das Punkte in einem kleineren Rechteck auf der Folie erlaubt.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pdsetup{
+ dminwidth=.1\slidewidth,dmaxwidth=.9\slidewidth,
+ dminheight=.2\slideheight,dmaxheight=.8\slideheight
+ }
+\end{Verbatim}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{dbright}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dbright}]
+Diese Option dient der Helligkeitseinstellung der Punkte.
+Der Wert sollte
+eine Zahl zwischen -100 und 100 sein. Wenn die Zahl negativ ist, wird die
+Farbe zu Schwarz abgedunkelt, wobei -100 Schwarz ergibt. Ist die Zahl dagegen
+positiv, wird die Farbe zu Weiß aufgehellt, wobei wiederum 100 Weiß ergibt.
+Ist der Folienhintergrund hell, nutzt man eher einen positiven Wert der Option
+\texttt{bright}, ist er dagegen dunkel, sollte man sich wohl für einen negativen Wert
+entscheiden. Der Standardwert ist \texttt{60}, was eine Mischung aus 40\ der Originalfarbe
+und 60\ Weiß ergibt.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{dprop}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{dprop}]
+Mithilfe dieser Option können zusätzliche Parameter zum
+\slash{psdot} Befehl hinzugefügt
+werden, welcher die Zufallspunkte erstellt. Beispielsweise der Stil oder die
+Linienstärke der Punkte sind so veränderbar. Für weitere Informationen bezüglich
+des \slash{psdot} Befehls sei auf die \pf{pstricks}-Dokumentation \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}
+verwiesen. \pf{Powerdot} enthält zwei zusätzliche Stile, die für Zufallspunkte
+eingesetzt werden können. Diese sind \texttt{ocircle} (offener Kreis) und
+\texttt{osquare} (offenes Quadrat).
+\end{description}
+
+Hier sind zwei Beispiele für den Gebrauch von Zufallspunkten.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dminwidth=.2\slidewidth
+ }
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieses Beispiel beinhaltet Zufallspunkte, verhindert aber, dass die linken
+20\ der Folie von ihnen genutzt wird.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.5pt},
+ dminsize=500pt,dmaxsize=600pt,dmindots=2,dmaxdots=5
+ }
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieses Beispiel setzt höchstens fünf große Kreise auf die Folie. Diese
+Kreise sind zu groß, um vollständig auf der Folie angezeigt werden zu können,
+weswegen man nur Teile von ihnen als Kurven sehen wird.
+
+\subsubsection{Ein \slash{pdsetup} \textbf{Beispiel}}
+
+Hier ein Beispiel für einen \slash{pdsetup} Befehl, mit dem man eine Präsentation
+beginnen könnte.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pdsetup{
+ lf=My first presentation,
+ rf=For some conference,
+ trans=Wipe,
+ theslide=\arabic{slide},
+ randomdots,dmaxdots=80
+ }
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dies setzt die linke und rechte Fußzeile und initialisiert den
+\texttt{Wipe}-Ãœbergangseffekt.
+Ferner beinhaltet die Foliennummerierung nicht die Nummer der letzten Folie, sondern
+einzig jene der aktuellen. Und schließlich werden die Folien mit bis zu 80
+Zufallspunkten bedeckt sein.
+
+Hier ist eine kurze Anmerkung bezüglich des Erscheinens von Fußzeilen nötig.
+Die Foliennummer (definiert von der \texttt{theslide}-Option) wird in einer Fußzeile
+angezeigt werden. Die meisten Stile setzen sie in die rechte Fußzeile. Wenn
+Fußzeile und Foliennummer nicht leer sind, wird \texttt{$\sim$--$\sim$} zwischen sie eingefügt
+werden, um sie voneinander abzutrennen. Einige Stile modifizieren womöglich
+diese Standardvorgehensweise.
+
+\section{Das Erstellen von Folien}\label{sec:slides}
+\subsection{Die Titelfolie}\label{sec:titleslide}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{title}\\\slash{author}\\\slash{and}\\\slash{date}\\\slash{maketitle}}
+Die Titelfolie wird mittels des \slash{maketitle} Befehls erstellt.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \{maketitle}<options>
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieser Befehl nutzt dieselben Werte wie jener des \LaTeX\ -Standarddokuments.
+Das optionale Argument <\texttt{options}> kann jede Option des Abschnittes~\ref{sec:glopts}
+enthalten. Das Einfügen einer solchen Option in den \slash{maketitle} Befehl betrifft
+nur die Titelfolie und keine andere. Man beachte das untere Beispiel.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \title{Title}
+ \author{You \and me}
+ \date{August 21, 2005}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Die \texttt{author}, \texttt{title} und \texttt{date}-Angaben definieren den beim Erstellen
+der Titelfolie zu nutzenden Text. Die Gestaltung der Titelseite wird durch den
+ausgesuchten Stil bestimmt. Man beachte den Gebrauch des \slash{and} Befehls, um
+mehrere Autoren aufzuführen. Weitere Informationen bezüglich der Befehle wie
+\slash{title} und \slash{author} sind im \LaTeX\ -Handbuch \cite{companion} enthalten.
+
+\subsection{Andere Folien}\label{sec:otherslides}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{slide}}
+Das Herzstück jeder Präsentation sind die Folien. Bei
+\pf{Powerdot} wird der Inhalt jeder Folie innerhalb einer \texttt{slide}-Umgebung
+definiert.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \begin{slide}[<options>]{<slide title>}
+ <body>
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Im Abschnitt~\ref{sec:overlays} werden wir sehen, wie man die Folien etwas
+lebendiger gestalten kann. Bleiben wir jetzt aber erst einmal bei einem simplen
+Beispiel.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{First slide}
+ Hello World.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Die Folienumgebung hat ein notwendiges Argument, nämlich den Folientitel.
+Sobald eine Folie erstellt wird, wird der Folientitel dafür genutzt, einen
+Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis und in die Lesezeichenliste einzufügen.
+Das Inhaltsverzeichnis ist eine Liste der Folien- und Abschnitttitel der
+Präsentation, die auf jeder Folie erscheint.
+
+Die aufgeführten Titel des Inhaltsverzeichnisses sind mit deren Folien und
+Abschnitten verlinkt (sofern die Präsentation ins PDF-Format kompiliert wurde)
+und bieten somit eine praktische Hilfe, um innerhalb der Präsentation rasch
+zwischen benötigten Folien zu wechseln. Die Lesezeichenliste erscheint erst,
+wenn die Kompilierung ins PDF-Format abgeschlossen ist. Sie dient ebenfalls
+als eine Art Inhaltsverzeichnis, erscheint allerdings auf \textit{keiner} der Folien,
+sondern in einem zusätzlichen Fenster im PDF-Viewer. Im obigen Beispiel werden
+die Einträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis wie in der Lesezeichenliste beide als
+\texttt{First slide} geführt.
+
+Die <\texttt{options}> für die \texttt{slide}-Umgebung können jene Optionen enthalten, die
+im Abschnitt~\ref{sec:glopts} enthalten sind. Zusätzlich können folgende Optionen
+benutzt werden.
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{toc}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{toc}]
+Wenn definiert, wird dieser Wert für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis genutzt;
+ansonsten wird dazu der Folientitel herangezogen. Wenn \texttt{toc=} definiert ist,
+wird kein Eintrag erstellt.
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{bm}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{bm}]
+Falls definiert, wird dieser Wert für den Eintrag in die Lesezeichenliste
+genutzt;
+ansonsten wird dazu der Folientitel herangezogen. Wenn \texttt{bm=} definiert ist, wird
+kein Eintrag erstellt.
+\end{description}
+
+Diese optionalen Argumente sind besonders nützlich, wenn der Folientitel sehr
+lang ist oder wenn er \LaTeX\ -Befehle enthält, die in den Lesezeichen nicht
+korrekt angezeigt werden würden.\footnote{Der Prozess, der die Lesezeichen
+setzt, nutzt \slash{pdfstringdef} vom \pf{hyperref}-Paket und kann mit akzentuierten
+Zeichen wie \slash{"i} umgehen.}
+Beim Erstellen der Einträge sollte darauf geachtet werden, spezielle Zeichen
+wie `,' und `=' zwischen den geschweiften Klammern `\{' und `\}' zu
+verstecken. Werfen wir einen Blick auf das Beispiel, das diese optionalen
+Argumente nutzt.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm={LaTeX, i*i=-1}]{\color{red}\LaTeX, $i^2=-1$}
+ My slide contents.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+In diesem Beispiel wird der Folientitel als \textcolor{red}{\LaTeX, $i^2=-1$}
+erscheinen.
+Dieser Text wird nicht korrekt als Lesezeichen
+angezeigt werden. Es wurde also ein Versuch unternommen, dieses zu
+korrigieren, aber oftmals ergibt dies nicht denselben Text. Der genannte
+Titel würde als Lesezeichen folgendermaßen angezeigt werden:
+\texttt{redLaTeX, i2=-1}.
+Auf der anderen Seite wird der manuell erstellte Lesezeicheneintrag so angezeigt:
+\texttt{LaTeX, i*i=-1}. Man beachte, dass kein Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgenommen
+werden wird, da der Wert \texttt{toc=} genutzt wurde.
+
+Zusätzlich zur \texttt{slide}-Umgebung kann jeder individuelle Stil seine eigenen
+Umgebungen definieren. Viele Stile haben eine \texttt{wideslide}-Umgebung. Dahinter
+steht die Idee, dass gewisser Inhalt aus Platzgründen schlecht oder überhaupt
+nicht mit dem Inhaltsverzeichnis zusammen auf einer Folie realisiert werden kann.
+In diesem Fall ist es von Vorteil, eine Folie zu nutzen, die das Inhaltsverzeichnis
+nicht aufführt. Die \texttt{wideslide}-Umgebung enthält diese Funktion und bietet so
+mehr Platz für den eigentlichen Folieninhalt. Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles} enthält
+mehr Informationen bezüglich der unterschiedlichen Umgebungen der einzelnen Stile.
+
+\section{Overlays}\label{sec:overlays}
+
+Oft möchte man nicht, dass alle Informationen auf einer Folie gleichzeitig erscheinen, sondern vielmehr,
+dass eine nach der anderen auftaucht. Bei \pf{powerdot} wird das mittels Overlays realisiert.
+Jede einzelne Folie kann viele Overlays enthalten, wobei die Overlays eines nach dem anderen ausgegeben
+werden.
+
+\subsection{Der \slash{pause} -Befehl}\label{sec:pause}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{pause}}
+Der Befehl \slash{pause} ist die einfachste Möglichkeit, Informationen aufeinanderfolgend
+auszugeben.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \{pause}[<number>]
+\end{Verbatim}
+Hier ein simples Beispiel:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Simple overlay}
+ power\pause dot
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der Informationstext auf einer Folie wird nur bis zum Befehl \slash{pause} ausgegeben, es erscheint also
+nichts anderes auf der Folie als dieses bestimmte Stück Text, solange nicht ein Klick mit der Maus erfolgt
+oder eine Taste gedrückt wird. Erst dann wird der weitere Inhalt der Folie ausgegeben, entweder bis diese
+keine weiteren Informationen mehr enthält oder bis zum nächsten
+\slash{pause} Befehl innerhalb derselben Folie. In diesem Beispiel
+erscheint \texttt{power} mit dem ersten und \texttt{powerdot} mit dem
+zweiten Overlay. Der \slash{pause} Befehl wird oft innerhalb von
+\texttt{itemize}- und \texttt{enumerate}-Umgebungen gebraucht, zum Beispiel:\\
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Multiple pauses}
+ power\pause dot \pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Let me pause\ldots \pause
+ \item \ldots while I talk \pause and chew bubble gum. \pause
+ \item Perhaps you'll be persuaded.
+ \item Perhaps not.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Indem \slash{pause} vor der \texttt{itemize}-Umgebung verwendet wurde, erscheint kein Stichpunkt vor dem
+dritten Overlay. Danach wird ein Stichpunkt nach dem anderen ausgegeben, wobei jeder sein eigenes Overlay
+hat. Mehr Informationen bezüglich der Verwendung von Listen folgen im nächsten Abschnitt.
+
+Ein optionales Argument (in eckigen Klammern) des \slash{pause} Befehls spezifiziert die Nummer der
+Overlays, die als Pause fungieren. Ein Verwendungsbeispiel ist:\\
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Pause longer}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause[2]
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Bei diesem Beispiel erscheint Stichpunkt \texttt{C} mit dem vierten Overlay. Die Nützlichkeit dieser
+Möglichkeit wird im nächsten Abschnitt deutlicher, entsprechend werden wir dann noch mal ein ähnliches
+Beispiel betrachten.
+
+\subsection{Listenumgebungen}\label{sec:lists}
+
+Die Listenumgebungen \texttt{itemize} und \texttt{enumerate} werden bei \pf{powerdot} in besonderer Weise
+behandelt. Sie haben ein optionales Argument, das im \pf{enumitem}-Paket enthalten ist (siehe [4]).
+\pf{powerdot} liefert eine extra Verschlüsselung für dieses optionale Argument. In den folgenden
+Beispielen wird die \texttt{itemize}-Umgebung zur Auflistung der einzelnen
+Punkte verwendet, mit der \texttt{enumerate}-Umgebung funktioniert es aber genauso.
+
+Hier ein Beispiel für den üblichen Gebrauch der \texttt{itemize}-Umgebung:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Basic itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Die Ausgabe erfolgt, indem einfach mit jedem Overlay ein Stichpunkt nach dem anderen erscheint.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{type}}
+
+Angenommen, wir wollten, dass alle Stichpunkte einer Folie zeitgleich auftauchen, dabei aber nur einer
+davon zum entsprechenden Zeitpunkt `aktiv' sein soll. Das wird realisiert
+mittels der \texttt{type}-Option für die \texttt{itemize}-Umgebung. Der
+vorgegebene Wert ist \texttt{0}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Jetzt wird jeder Stichpunkt in der \emph{inaktiven Farbe}\index{inaktive Farbe|usage} (die durch den
+verwendeten \pf{powerdot}-Stil festgelegt ist) ausgegeben. Mit dem Overlay, mit dem ein Stichpunkt
+normalerweise erst erscheinen würde, bekommt dieser seine eigentliche Farbe und wird darüber aktiv.
+Das Standardverhalten ist mit \texttt{type=0} gegeben.
+
+Listen können auch ineinander gestapelt sein, um so kompliziertere Strukturen zu schaffen. Wenn eine Liste
+eingebettet ist in eine andere, enthält sie die \texttt{type}-Option-Einstellungen der `Mutter'-Liste. Das
+kann
+aber aufgehoben werden, indem die \texttt{type}-Option beim optionalen Argument der eingebetteten Liste
+genauer definiert wird. Unser Beispiel zeigt nur ein mögliches, mittels gestapelter Listen produziertes
+Konstrukt, es können jedoch auch Konstrukte anderer Art und auf andere Weise kreiert werden.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Nested lists}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A\pause
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item B\pause
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Hier werden \texttt{A} und \texttt{B} mit dem ersten Overlay ausgegeben,
+aber \texttt{B} ist inaktiv. Erst mit dem zweiten Overlay wird \texttt{B}
+aktiv, mit Overlay 3 wird \texttt{C} sichtbar.
+
+\subsection{Der \slash{item} -Befehl}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{item}}
+
+Dieser Befehl hat bei \pf{powerdot} noch ein extra Argument (\emph{optional}), das eine flexiblere Produktion
+von Overlays erlaubt als der \slash{pause} Befehl.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \item[<label>]<<overlays>>
+\end{Verbatim}
+Mit diesem optionalen Argument kann man spezifizieren, mit welchem Overlay ein bestimmter Stichpunkt
+ausgegeben wird. Diese Spezifikation ist eine durch ein Komma separierte Liste, wo jeder Stichpunkt die in
+Tabelle \ref{tab:item} angegebenen Notationen nutzen kann.
+\begin{table}[htb]\centering
+\begin{tabular}{c|l}
+Syntax&Meaning\\\hline
+\texttt{x}&Nur Overlay \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{-x}&Alle Overlays bis zu \texttt{x}, \texttt{x} eingeschlossen\\
+\texttt{x-}&Alle Overlays ab \texttt{x}, \texttt{x} eingeschlossen\\
+\texttt{x-y}&Alle Overlays von \texttt{x} bis \texttt{y}, \texttt{x} und \texttt{y} eingeschlossen\\
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\slash{item} und \slash{onslide}-Notation}\label{tab:item}
+\end{table}
+Das <label>-Argument ist für das optionale Argument des \slash{item}
+Befehls bei \LaTeX\ Standard. Das
+\LaTeX\ -Handbuch \cite{companion} enthält noch mehr Informationen bezüglich dieses Arguments.
+
+Hier ein Beispiel:\\
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Active itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item<1> A
+ \item<2> B
+ \item<3> C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Wie oben besprochen, sollte \texttt{A} nur bei Overlay 1, \texttt{B} nur bei
+Overlay 2 und \texttt{C} nur bei Overlay 3 aktiv sein, im inaktiven Status sollten die jeweiligen
+Stichpunkte wegen \texttt{type=1} in der inaktiven Farbe erscheinen.
+
+Wenn die \texttt{type}-Option aber als \texttt{type=0} definiert und jedem Stichpunkt eine Overlay-Option
+gegeben wurde, erscheint jeder Stichpunkt nur, wenn er aktiv ist. Ist er inaktiv, wird er nicht auf der Folie
+angezeigt. Weitere Beispiele, die die Syntax für <overlays> demonstrieren, werden im nächsten Abschnitt
+diskutiert.
+
+\subsection{Der \slash{onslide} -Befehl}\label{sec:onslide}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{onslide}}
+Overlays können auch unter Verwendung des \slash{onslide} Befehls geschaffen werden.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \onslide{<overlays>}{<text>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Der Befehl benötigt eine <overlays>-Spezifizierung als erstes Argument und
+den <text>, der auf der Folie erscheinen soll, als zweites Argument. Die
+<overlays>, auf denen der Text erscheinen wird, werden genauer definiert als eine durch ein Komma
+separierte Aufzählung mit der in Tabelle \ref{tab:item} dargestellten Syntax. Wir beginnen mit einem
+einfachen Beispiel:\\
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide}
+ \onslide{1,2}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Wir haben eingerichtet, dass \texttt{power} mit den Overlays 1 und 2
+erscheint, \texttt{dot} nur mit Overlay 2. Wie bereits vermutet wird bei diesem Beispiel das Gleiche
+ausgegeben wie bei dem ersten \slash{pause}-Beispiel, einziger Unterschied ist die etwas kompliziertere
+Syntax des \slash{onslide} Befehls. Allerdings erlaubt genau das ein bisschen mehr Flexibilität.
+
+\marginpar{\slash{onslide+}}
+Betrachten wir dasselbe Beispiel mit den folgenden Modifikationen:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide+}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der \slash{onslide+} Befehl gibt seinen Inhalt in völlig anderer Art und
+Weise aus. Jetzt erscheint \texttt{dot} mit jedem Overlay, allerdings wird
+es außer bei Overlay 2 \textit{nur} in seiner inaktiven
+Farbe\index{inaktiven Farbe|usage} ausgegeben. Das ist vergleichbar mit dem
+\texttt{type=1}-Verhalten für die Listen (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+Wenn wir dieses Beispiel ausführen, werden wir zudem feststellen, dass der
+\slash{onslide} Befehl zunächst Material verbirgt, und doch die richtige Menge an Platz dafür reserviert. Bei
+Overlay 2 erscheinen die \texttt{dot}s alle übereinander. Der nächste Befehl reserviert keinen Platz.
+
+\marginpar{\slash{onslide*}}
+Statt bestimmtes Material zu verbergen und Platz dafür zu reservieren
+(\slash{onslide}) oder <text> außer beim entsprechenden Overlay (<overlays>) in der inaktiven Farbe
+auszugeben (\slash{onslide+}), gibt dieser Befehl das Material einfach ohne jede weitere Formatierung aus.
+Betrachten wir folgendes Beispiel, um den Unterschied zu verstehen:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide*}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide*}: \onslide*{1}{power}\onslide*{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Wir sind bereits vertraut mit der Ausgabe der ersten zwei Zeilen. Die
+dritte Zeile gibt \texttt{power} mit Overlay 1 und \texttt{dot} mit Overlay 2 aus, allerdings ist bei
+Overlay 2 kein Platz für \texttt{power} reserviert. Stattdessen wird
+\texttt{dot} an der gleichen Position des Cursors beginnen, bei der
+\texttt{power} mit dem ersten Overlay ausgegeben wurde, und es ist auch nicht in einer Linie unter den
+anderen \texttt{dot}s angeordnet.
+
+Abschließend betrachten wir ein Syntax-Beispiel, das sowohl mit
+\slash{item} als auch mit \slash{onslide} möglich ist.
+Noch mal zur Erinnerung: Diese Befehle benötigen eine durch ein Komma separierte Aufzählung für die genauere
+Definierung des <overlays>-Arguments. Dabei kann jedes Element die in Tabelle \ref{tab:item} beschriebene
+Syntax nutzen. Die verschiedenen Varianten sind in folgendem Beispiel demonstriert:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Lists}
+ \onslide{10}{on overlay 10 only}\par
+ \onslide{-5}{on every overlay before and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{5-}{on every overlay after and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{2-5}{on overlays 2 through 5, inclusive}\par
+ \onslide{-3,5-7,9-}{on every overlay except overlays 4 and 8}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Relative Overlays}
+
+Manchmal ist es sehr lästig, im Auge zu behalten, wann ein Stichpunkt auftauchen beziehungsweise aktiv
+werden soll, zum Beispiel, wenn man möchte, dass ein bestimmter Text auf dem entsprechenden Overlay
+\textit{nach} einem speziellen Stichpunkt erscheinen soll. Abhilfe dafür leisten relative Overlays, die
+allerdings nicht außerhalb von \slash{item}-Listenumgebungen verwendet werden sollten. Betrachten wir ein
+einfaches, einleuchtendes Beispiel:
+
+ \begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\footnotesize]
+ \begin{slide}{Relative overlays}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \onslide{+1}{(visible 1 overlay after B)}\pause
+ \item C \onslide{+2-}{(appears 2 overlays after C, visible until the end)}
+ \pause
+ \item D \onslide{+1-6}{(appears 1 overlay after D, visible until overlay 6)}
+ \pause
+ \item E \pause
+ \item F \pause
+ \item G \onslide{+1-+3}{(appears 1 overlay after G for 3 overlays)}
+ \pause
+ \item H \pause
+ \item I \pause
+ \item J \pause
+ \item K
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Wie zu sehen ist, wird auch hier der \slash{onslide} Befehl genutzt, die einzige Veränderung der Syntax ist
+die Auflistung der Overlays. Dadurch kann ein `\texttt{+}'-Zeichen in der Liste genauer definiert werden. In
+der simpelsten Verwendung wird durch den \slash{onslide}\{+1\} Befehl der entsprechende Text ein Overlay nach
+demjenigen ausgegeben, auf dem er \textit{eigentlich} erschienen wäre. Nach wie vor kann die in Tabelle
+\ref{tab:item} dargestellte Syntax verwendet werden, demonstriert im oben
+stehenden Beispiel. \slash{onslide}\{+1-6\} bewirkt ebenfalls, dass der entsprechende Text ein Overlay nach
+demjenigen ausgegeben wird, auf dem er eigentlich erschienen wäre, und dass schon ausgegebene Textpassagen
+bis Overlay 7 gezeigt bleiben. In der letzten Demonstration des oben stehenden Beispiels wird gezeigt, wie
+man den Text einer ganzen Reihe von relativen Overlays erscheinen lassen kann.
+
+\section{Präsentationsstrukturen}\label{sec:structure}
+\subsection{Abschnitte herstellen}\label{sec:section}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{section}}
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt den \slash{section} Befehl, der die Möglichkeit eröffnet, eine Präsentation zu
+strukturieren.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \section[<options>]{<section title>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieser Befehl produziert eine Folie mit dem <section title> und nutzt außerdem den eingesetzten Text für die
+Repräsentation des entsprechenden Abschnitts in einem Inhaltsverzeichnis und der Lesezeichenliste. Es gibt
+diverse <options> um die Ausgabe zu kontrollieren.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocsection}}
+Diese Option kontrolliert die Repräsentation eines Abschnittes im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Der vorgegebene Wert
+ist \texttt{true}.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsection=true}]
+So wird ein Abschnitt im Inhaltsverzeichnis geschaffen. Das bedeutet, dass alle nun folgenden Folien unter
+diesem Gliederungspunkt erscheinen, bis ein neuer eingefügt wird.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsection=false}]
+Auf diese Art und Weise wird kein Abschnitt im Inhaltsverzeichnis geschaffen, somit wird dieser als normale
+Folie eingeordnet und aufgeführt.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsection=hidden}]
+
+So wird ein Abschnitt im Inhaltsverzeichnis hergestellt, aber er ist nur sichtbar, wenn man eine Folie
+ansieht, die zu diesem Abschnitt gehört. Diese Funktion könnte verwendet werden, um einen zu diskutierenden
+Abschnitt an die Präsentation anzuhängen, der aber nur dann gebraucht und entsprechend gezeigt wird, wenn
+noch genügend Zeit für diese Diskussion ist.
+\end{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{slide}}
+
+Diese Option bestimmt, ob der \slash{section} Befehl eine Folie schafft.
+Der vorgegebene Wert ist \slash{true}.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{slide=true}]
+
+So wird eine Folie hergestellt.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{slide=false}]
+
+So wird keine Folie hergestellt. Wenn auch \texttt{tocsection=false} ist,
+bewirkt der \slash{section} Befehl gar nichts. Wenn ein Inhaltsverzeichnisabschnitt hergestellt wird
+(\texttt{tocsection= true oder hidden}), der Abschnitt aber selbst keine eigene Folie hat, verweist seine
+Verknüpfung auf die erste Folie unter diesem Abschnitt.
+\end{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{template}}
+Diese Option kann verwendet werden, um eine Abschnittsfolie mit einer anderen Schablone zu erstellen. Bei
+default wird eine normale \slash{slide}-Umgebung genutzt, um eine Abschnittsfolie herzustellen, aber wenn
+ein Stil andere Schablonen bietet, die für einen bestimmten Zweck genutzt werden könnten (zum Beispiel die
+\texttt{wideslide}-Umgebung), dann ermöglicht diese Option die Nutzung der entsprechenden Schablone.
+Abschnitt ~\ref{sec:styles} gibt einen Überblick über die verschiedenen Stile und deren verfügbaren
+Schablonen.
+
+Letztendlich können alle für normale Folien verfügbare Optionen auch für Folien verwendet werden, die mit
+dem \slash{section} Befehl erstellt worden sind (siehe Abschnitt ~\ref{sec:slides}). Wenn ein Abschnitt mit
+einer \texttt{tocsection}-Option erstellt wird, entfernen \texttt{toc=} oder
+\texttt{bm=} das einleitende Inhaltsverzeichnis oder das entsprechende Lesezeichen nicht.
+
+\subsection{Das Erstellen einer Ãœbersicht}\label{sec:tableofcontents}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{tableofcontents}}
+Dieser Befehl erstellt eine Übersicht (Gliederung) für Präsentationen und kann nur für Folien genutzt werden.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \tableofcontents[<options>]
+\end{Verbatim}
+Es gibt diverse <options> um die Ausgabe dieses Befehls zu kontrollieren.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{type}}
+Diese Option bestimmt, ob gewisses Material (abhängig von der Eingabe für
+die \texttt{content}-Option weiter unten) versteckt oder in der inaktiven Farbe\index{inaktiven Farbe|usage}
+ausgegeben wird. Der vorgegebene Wert ist \texttt{0}. Sie ist vergleichbar
+mit der \texttt{type}-Option für Listenumgebungen (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{type=0}]
+
+Wenn Material nicht dem gefragten Typ (bei der \texttt{content}-Option spezifiziert) entspricht, wird es
+versteckt.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{type=1}]
+
+Genau wie \texttt{type=0}, nur dass das Material nicht versteckt, sondern in der inaktiven Farbe ausgegeben
+wird.
+\end{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{content}}
+Die \texttt{content}-Option kontrolliert, welche Elemente in den Ãœberblick aufgenommen werden. Der
+vorgegebene Wert ist \texttt{all}. Die unten stehende Beschreibung setzt
+für die \texttt{type}-Option \texttt{type=0} voraus, es ist aber kein Problem, den alternativen Text für
+\texttt{type=1} daraus zu folgern.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{content=all}]
+
+So wird der vollständige Überblick einer Präsentation ausgeben, einschließlich aller Abschnitte und der
+Folien, die nicht in Abschnitten versteckt sind (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:section}).
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{content=sections}]
+
+So werden nur die Abschnitte in der Präsentation ausgegeben.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{content=currentsection}]
+
+So wird nur der aktuelle Abschnitt ausgegeben.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{content=future}]
+
+So wird der gesamte Inhalt beginnend bei der aktuellen Folie ausgegeben.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{content=futuresections}]
+
+So werden alle Abschnitte beginnend beim aktuellen Abschnitt ausgegeben.
+\end{description}
+
+Diesen Abschnitt beendet ein kleines Beispiel, das demonstriert, wie man eine Präsentation entwickelt, die
+einen allgemeinen Überblick der Abschnitte in der Präsentation enthält, eine grundsätzliche Idee des Inhalts
+und für jeden Abschnitt eine detaillierte Übersicht über seine einzelnen Folien liefert.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview}
+ \tableofcontents[content=sections]
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{First section}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview of the first section}
+ \tableofcontents[content=currentsection,type=1]
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{Some slide}
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{Second section}
+ ...
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\section{Sonstiges}
+\subsection{Anmerkungen}\label{sec:notes}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{note}}
+Die \texttt{note}-Umgebung kann verwendet werden, um persönliche Anmerkungen in den eigentlichen Folientext
+einzugliedern. Die Ausgabe der Anmerkungen kann mittels der
+\texttt{display}-Option kontrolliert werden (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:classopts}). Hier ist ein Beispiel:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Chewing gum}
+ ...
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{Reminder for chewing gum}
+ Don't forget to mention that chewing gum is sticky.
+ \end{note}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Leere Folien}\label{sec:emptyslides}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{emptyslide}}
+Die \texttt{emptyslide}-Umgebung stellt eine völlig leere Folie her. Die Textbox auf der Folie könnte für
+spezielle Dinge verwendet werden, wie zum Beispiel die Ausgabe von Fotos. Diese Funktion erlaubt also auch
+das Erstellen und Wiedergeben einer Diashow. Zum Beispiel:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{emptyslide}{}
+ \centering
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \includegraphics[height=0.8\slideheight]{me_chewing_gum.eps}
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \end{emptyslide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der \slash{includegraphics} Befehl wird durch das \pf{graphicx}-Paket \cite{graphics} definiert. Der
+\slash{stretch} Befehl wird verwendet, um das Bild vertikal zu zentrieren. Beide Befehle sind in Ihrem
+Lieblings-\LaTeX\ -Handbuch beschrieben, zum Beispiel \cite{companion}. Man kann zudem die Längen
+\slash{slideheight} und \slash{slidewidth} nutzen, um das Bild maßstabsgetreu der Folie anzupassen.
+
+\subsection{Die Folie mit der Bibliographie}\label{sec:bib}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{thebibliography}}
+\pf{powerdot} benennt die standardisierte \pf{article}
+\texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung um, damit die Erstellung einer Abschnittsüberschrift und fortlaufender
+Kopfzeilen unterdrückt wird. Alle anderen Bestandteile wurden beibehalten. Jeweils eines der folgenden
+Beispiele können Sie verwenden (abhängig davon, ob Sie BiB\TeX\ nutzen oder nicht):\\
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+\end{slide}
+\begin{slide}{References}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{1}
+ \bibitem{someone} Article of
+ someone.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+\end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \bibliography{YourBib}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+
+Für den Fall längerer Bibliographien, die auf mehrere Folien verteilt werden sollen, empfiehlt sich die
+Verwendung der Pakete \pf{natbib} und \pf{bibentry} \cite{natbib}. Das erlaubt Folgendes:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{References (1)}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \nobibliography{YourBib}
+ \bibentry{someone1}
+ \bibentry{someone2}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References (2)}
+ \bibentry{someone3}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Werfen Sie einen Blick in Ihr Lieblings-\LaTeX\ -Handbuch für weitere Informationen zum Zitieren und zu
+Bibliographien.
+
+\subsection{Wortwörtliche Wiedergabe auf Folien}\label{sec:verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{verbatim}}
+\pf{powerdot} hat drei verschiedene Methoden, Folien aufzubereiten, von denen zwei hauptsächlich entwickelt
+wurden, um das Einbeziehen wortwörtlichen Inhalts\footnote{Und anderer Inhalt, der bei der Verarbeitung
+catcode-Veränderungen benötigt wird.} auf Folien einfacher zu gestalten. Diese
+Methoden können beim \texttt{method} key abgerufen werden, der in
+Folienumgebungen und dem \slash{pdsetup} Befehl verfügbar ist (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:glopts}).
+\begin{description}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{method=normal}]
+
+Dies ist die vorgegebene Methode der Aufbereitung von Folien. Sie ist schnell und erlaubt die Verwendung
+von Overlays, nicht aber die wortwörtliche Wiedergabe.\footnote{Außer wenn es in einer Box außerhalb der
+Folie gesichert wurde.}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{method=direct}]
+
+Diese Methode ist auch schnell, aber sie erlaubt nicht die Verwendung von Overlays. Overlays werden
+unauffällig außer Gefecht gesetzt. Allerdings ermöglicht diese Methode wortwörtlichen Inhalt auf Folien.
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{method=file}]
+
+Diese Methode nutzt einen provisorischen Ordner, um den Folienkörper zu exportieren und wieder einzulesen.
+Damit erlaubt sie die Verwendung von Overlays und wortwörtlichen Inhalt, aber sie ist mitunter langsamer,
+wenn viele Folien mit dieser Methode aufbereitet werden, da das Ordnersystem dann intensiv genutzt ist.
+\end{description}
+
+Hier ist ein Beispiel, dass die Nutzung aller drei Folienaufbereitungsmethoden demonstriert:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \lstnewenvironment{code}{
+ \lstset{frame=single,escapeinside=`',
+ backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily}
+ }{}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide 1}
+ Normal \pause content.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=direct]{Slide 2}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=file]{Slide 3}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Die erste Folie zeigt das Standardverhalten für normalen Inhalt, sie produziert zwei Overlays. Trotz der
+Verwendung des \slash{pause} Befehls erstellt die zweite Folie keine Overlays. Dieser Befehl wurde
+untauglich gemacht mit der Wahl für die \texttt{direct}-Methode, um wortwörtlichen Inhalt aufzubereiten. Die
+dritte Folie hat das gleiche Aussehen, wie die zweite, aber jetzt werden zwei Overlays produziert, weil die
+Methode, die einen provisorischen Ordner nutzt, verwendet wurde.
+\slash{pause} wurde hier innerhalb der Auflistung gebraucht, der Befehl kann aber genauso außerhalb von
+Listenumgebungen benutzt werden.
+
+\subsection{Der \slash{twocolumn} Befehl}\label{sec:twocolumn}
+
+\marginpar{\slash{twocolumn}}
+Das \slash{twocolumn}-Makro erlaubt, den Inhalt auf zwei Spalten aufzuteilen.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \twocolumn[<options>]{<left>}{<right>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+So wird <left> und <right> in zwei Spalten gesetzt. Die Abmessungen dieser
+Spalten können mit <options> kontrolliert werden.
+Hier die verfügbaren Optionen:
+
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lineheight}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lineheight}]
+
+Wenn \texttt{lineheight} spezifiziert wird, erscheint durch \slash{psline} eine Linie von bestimmter Höhe
+zwischen den Spalten. Beispiel: \texttt{lineheight=6cm}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lineprop}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lineprop}]
+
+Mit jeder \pf{pstricks}-Angabe können die Linienproportionen näher bestimmt werden. Beispiel:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ lineprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lfrheight\\lfrprop}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lfrheight} \quad \fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lfrprop}]
+
+Ersteres schafft einen Rahmen von bestimmter Höhe um die linke Spalte,
+zweiteres ist wie \texttt{lineprop}, aber für den linken Rahmen.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{rfrheight\\rfrprop}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{rfrheight} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{rfrprop}]
+
+Genau wie \texttt{lfrheight} und \texttt{lfrprop}, allerdings für den rechten Rahmen.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lcolwidth\\rcolwidth}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lcolwidth}
+\quad \fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{rcolwidth}]
+
+Die Weite von linker und rechter Spalte. Beide sind vorgegeben mit
+\texttt{0.47}\slash{linewidth}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{frsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{frsep}]
+
+Platz zwischen Text und Rahmen, vorgegeben mit \texttt{1,5mm}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{colsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{colsep}]
+
+Platz zwischen den beiden Spalten, vorgegeben mit \texttt{0.06}\slash{linewidth}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{topsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{topsep}]
+
+Der extra Platz (zusätzlich zu \slash{baselineskip}) zwischen dem Text über den Spalten und dem Text in den
+Spalten, vorgegebener Wert: \texttt{0cm}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{bottomsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{bottomsep}]
+
+Der extra Platz zwischen dem Text in den Spalten und dem Text darunter,
+vorgegebener Wert: \texttt{0cm}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{indent}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{indent}]
+
+Horizontaler Zeileneinzug links zur linken Spalte, vorgegebener Wert:
+\texttt{0cm}.
+\end{description}
+Die oben beschriebenen Abmessungen sind in Figur \ref{fig:twocolumndim} graphisch dargestellt.
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{pspicture}(0,.5)(13,10.5)
+\psline(0,0.5)(0,10)
+\rput[tl](.05,9.95){Top}
+\psframe[dimen=middle](1,9)(7,2)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,9)(11,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(8.5,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(11,2)
+\qdisk(1.7,8.3){.1cm}
+\psset{linestyle=dashed}
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(1.7,3)
+\psline{C-C}(6.3,5)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(11,9)(12,9)
+\psline{C-C}(11,2)(12,2)
+\psline{C-C}(11,7)(12,7)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(12,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(9.2,3)
+\rput[tl](1.75,8.25){Left column text}
+\rput[tl](9.25,8.25){Right column text}
+\rput[tl](.05,1){Bottom}
+\psset{linestyle=dotted,dotsep=2pt}
+\psline(0,8.3)(1.7,8.3)
+\psline(0,9.6)(1,9.6)
+\psline(0,2)(1,2)
+\psline(0,1.1)(1,1.1)
+\psset{linestyle=solid}
+\psline{<->}(.2,8.33)(.2,9.57)
+\psline{<->}(4,8.33)(4,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(1.73,7)(6.27,7)
+\psline{<->}(1.03,6.5)(1.67,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(0.03,5.5)(1.67,5.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,7.4)(9.17,7.4)
+\psline{<->}(8.53,6.5)(9.17,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,6.5)(6.97,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(10.7,8.33)(10.7,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(7.3,8.97)(7.3,2.03)
+\psline{<->}(.2,1.13)(.2,1.97)
+\psline{->}(1.7,9.3)(1.7,8.45)
+\psline{<-}(9.23,7)(11,7)
+\cput(4,6.6){\small 1}
+\cput(11.1,6.6){\small 2}
+\cput(8,7){\small 3}
+\cput(7.7,3){\small 4}
+\cput(4.4,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(1.35,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(8.85,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(11.1,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(6.65,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(0.6,8.95){\small 6}
+\cput(0.6,5.1){\small 7}
+\cput(0.6,1.55){\small 8}
+\cput(1.7,9.6){\small 9}
+\end{pspicture}
+\begin{tabular}{c p{4cm}cl}
+\multicolumn{4}{c}{Bedeutung der labels}\\\hline
+1&\texttt{lcolwidth}&5&\texttt{frsep}\\
+2&\texttt{rcolwidth}&6&\texttt{topsep}\\
+3&\texttt{colsep}&7&\texttt{indent}\\
+4&\texttt{lfrheight}, \texttt{rfrheight},&8&\texttt{bottomsep}\\
+&\texttt{lineheight}&9&Reference point
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Two-column dimensions.}\label{fig:twocolumndim}
+\end{figure}
+Wichtig zu bemerken ist, dass das \slash{twocolumn}-Makro die aktuelle Cursor-Position als Bezugspunkt für
+die erste Zeile des Textes der linken Spalte nutzt (siehe auch Figur \ref{fig:twocolumndim}). Das heißt,
+dass der optionale Rahmen bis zum Text der vorausgehenden Zeile ausgedehnt werden kann. Man kann in diesem
+Fall beispielsweise \texttt{topsep=0,3cm} einfügen, um extra Platz zwischen diesen beiden Textzeilen zu
+schaffen. Der vorgegebene \texttt{topsep}-Wert basiert darauf, dass sich kein Text unmittelbar über den
+Spalten befindet. In diesem Fall lokalisiert man am besten den Ort der ersten Textzeile der linken Spalte am
+gleichen Punkt, bei dem ein gewisser Text nicht durch den \slash{twocolumn} Befehl auf anderen Folien
+erstellt wird. Die \texttt{topsep=0}-Einstellung bewirkt genau das. Durch
+die Kombination von \texttt{topsep} und \texttt{indent} lässt sich dieses Verhalten und die Position der
+ersten Textzeile der linken Spalte beliebig ändern.
+
+Das \slash{twocolumn}-Makro errechnet die Größe der Konstruktion, um den Text darunter korrekt zu
+positionieren. Die Berechnung ist fertig, wenn für \texttt{lfrheight},
+\texttt{rfrheight}, \texttt{lineheight} (falls genauer bestimmt) das Maximum festgesetzt wird. So werden
+rechte und linke Spalte stimmig ausgegeben. Wenn weder Rahmen noch Linien
+eingefügt werden, setzt \texttt{bottomsep} den horizontalen Platz zwischen der untersten Textzeile der
+Spalten und dem Text unter den Spalten (zusätzlich zu \slash{baselineskip}). Hier ein Beispiel:
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Two columns}
+ Here are two columns.
+ \twocolumn[
+ lfrprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt},
+ lfrheight=4cm,rfrheight=5cm,lineheight=3cm,topsep=0.3cm
+ ]{left}{right}
+ Those were two columns.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Hier könnte die Verwendung der \pf{xkeyval}-Befehle \slash{savevalue} und
+\slash{usevalue} \index{savevalue=\verb!*+\savevalue+|usage}\index{usevalue=\verb!*+\usevalue+|usage}
+nützlich sein, zum Beispiel wenn man die Eigenschaften des linken Rahmens für den rechten kopieren will. So
+vermeidet man nicht nur eine überflüssige zweite Typisierung, sondern auch, Fehler zu machen, die in
+unterschiedlich großen Rahmen resultieren würden. Betrachten wir das unten stehende Beispiel:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+\twocolumn[
+ \savevalue{lfrheight}=3cm,
+ \savevalue{lfrprop}={
+ linestyle=dotted,framearc=.2,linewidth=3pt},
+ rfrheight=\usevalue{lfrheight},
+ rfrprop=\usevalue{lfrprop}
+ ]{left}{right}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Ziehen Sie die \pf{xkeyval}-Dokumentation \cite{xkeyval} zu Rate, um mehr
+über die \slash{savevalue} und \slash{usevalue} Befehle zu erfahren.
+
+\section{Zur Verfügung stehende Stile}\label{sec:styles}
+
+\pf{Powerdot} enthält eine Zahl von Stilen, welche im nachfolgenden
+Überblick aufgeführt sind. Die Charakteristik jedes Stils ist kurz
+beschrieben und von einem Beispiel einer Titelfolie und einer normalen
+Folie begleitet. Styles die auf der \texttt{wideslide} Umgebung beruhen, haben
+ein Inhaltsverzeichnis auf dem linken Rand im Querformat (landscape)
+und am unteren Rand im Hochformat (portrait) der Folien. Das Hochformat
+wird unterstützt, sofern es nicht anders angelegt wird.
+\begin{description}
+\item\pf{default}\\
+Dieser Standard-Stil bietet sechs verschiedene Layouts. Jedes wird von
+einer Blume in der linken, oberen Ecke dekoriert. Das blaue Layout des
+default-Stils hat als Hauptfarben hellblau, blau und weiß wie im Beispiel
+unterhalb. Andere verfügbare Layouts sind \texttt{red}, \texttt{green},
+\texttt{yellow}, \texttt{brown} and \texttt{purple}.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-default.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-default.002}
+
+\end{description}
+
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\pf{simple}\\
+Dies ist ein einfacher Stil in schwarz und weiß. Er könnte für Folien
+nützlich sein, die ausgedruckt werden sollen.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-simple.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-simple.002}
+
+\item\pf{tycja}\\
+Dieser Stil zeigt sich in gelben und dunkelblauen Schattierungen. Im
+Querformat ist das Inhaltsverzeichnis auf der rechten Seite und im Hochformat
+am unteren Rand der Folien.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-tycja.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-tycja.002}
+
+\item\pf{ikeda}\\
+In diesem Stil zeigen sich die Folien in dunklen Schattierungen von Rot und Blau
+sowie dazu heller Textfarbe. Zudem wird ein schmuckvolles Muster auf der Folie
+verwendet.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ikeda.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ikeda.002}
+
+\item\pf{fyma}\\
+Dieser Stil wurde von Laurent Jaques für \pf{prosper} entworfen und darauf
+basierend, entwickelte er eine Version für \pf{HA-prosper} mit zusätzlichen
+Eigenschaften. Mit freundlicher Genehmigung wurde der Stil von Shun'ichi J. Amano
+konvertiert, um ihn auch für \pf{powerdot} verfügbar zu machen. Das Layout
+\texttt{blue} hat ein elegantes Design mit einem Verlauf aus hellblau und weiß als
+Hintergrund (siehe Beispiel). Weitere Layouts sind \texttt{green}, \texttt{gray},
+\texttt{brown} und \texttt{orange}. Außerdem gibt es spezielle Schablonen für
+Bereiche auf Folien und breite Folien.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-fyma.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-fyma.002}
+
+\item\pf{ciment}\\
+Entworfen von Mathieu Goutelle für \pf{prosper} und \pf{HA-prosper} ist auch
+dieser Stil dank freundlicher Genehmigung umgewandelt worden und somit für
+\pf{powerdot} verfügbar. Der Stil hat einen mit hellgrauen Linien, horizontal
+schraffierten Hintergrund. Inhaltsverzeichnis und Ãœberschriften sind mit einem
+dunklen Rot hervor gehoben.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ciment.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ciment.002}
+
+\item\pf{elcolors}\\
+Dieser Stil benutzt die Farben der Drei-Farben-Theorie nach Thomas Young,
+nämlich Schattierungen in rot, blau und gelb.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ciment.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-ciment.002}
+
+\item\pf{aggie}\\
+Jack Stalnaker entwarf diesen Stil für \pf{HA-prosper}und hat ihn dann
+für \pf{powerdot} konvertiert. Verwendet wird dunkles Rot und ein helles Braun.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-aggie.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-aggie.002}
+
+\item\pf{husky}\\
+Auch dieser Stil stammt von Jack Stalnaker und zeigt markante Rotschrift vor
+einem sonnenartigen, hellgrauen Hintergrund.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-husky.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-husky.002}
+
+\item\pf{sailor}\\
+Dieser Stil ist von Mael Hill\'ereau beigetragen und bietet fünf verschiedene
+Layouts: \texttt{Sea} (the default), \texttt{River}, \texttt{Wine},
+\texttt{Chocolate} und \texttt{Cocktail}. Abgebildet ist ein Beispiel des
+Layouts \texttt{Sea}.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-sailor.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-sailor.002}
+
+\item\pf{upen}\\
+Ein tiefes Blau als Hintergrund und gelber Text zeichnen diesen Stil aus.
+Er stammt von Piskala Upendran.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-husky.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-husky.002}
+
+\item\pf{bframe}\\
+Der \pf{bframe} Stil ist ebenfalls von Piskala Upendran und hat blaue,
+abgerundete Boxen in welche der weiße Text eingefügt wird.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-bframe.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-bframe.002}
+
+\item\pf{horatio}\\
+Der Stil \pf{horatio} wurde von Michael Lundholm beigesteuert und ist
+eher zurückhaltend, in blauer und weißer Farbgebung.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-horatio.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-horatio.002}
+
+\item\pf{paintings}\\
+Dies ist ein einfacherer Stil ohne Inhaltsverzeichnis. Er wurde von
+Thomas Koepsell entworfen und ermöglicht 10 verschiedene Layouts.
+Die dabei jeweils verwendeten Farben lehnen an berühmte Gemälde
+an.\footnote{Der Stil benutzt einen Farbton, \texttt{pdcolor7}, welcher
+nicht in den Layouts verwendet wird, aber dennoch wie die anderen
+Farben von entsprechenden Gemälden stammt. Der Farbton kann
+beispielsweise benutzt werden um einen Text hervor zu heben.}
+Welche Gemälde als Vorlage dienten, kann man in der style file,
+der den Stil definierenden Datei nachlesen. Die zum Stil verfügbaren
+Layouts lauten: \texttt{Syndics} (Standard-Layout), \texttt{Skater},
+\texttt{GoldenGate}, \texttt{Lamentation},
+\texttt{HolyWood}, \texttt{Europa}, \texttt{Moitessier},
+\texttt{MayThird}, \texttt{PearlEarring} und \texttt{Charon}. Hier
+ ist ein Beispiel in \texttt{Syndics}.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-paintings.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-paintings.002}
+
+\item\pf{klope}\\
+Der Stil \pf{klope} führt ein horizontales Inhaltsverzeichnis aus,
+das nur die als \texttt{section} deklarierten Gliederungspunkte listet.
+Folgende Layouts stehen zur Verfügung: \texttt{Spring}, \texttt{PastelFlower},
+\texttt{BlueWater} und \texttt{BlackWhite}. Das Layout \texttt{Spring},
+welches hier als Beispiel dient, entspricht dem Standard-Layout.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-klope.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-klope.002}
+
+\item\pf{jefka}\\
+Dieser Stil bietet vier Layouts: \texttt{brown} (Standard),
+\texttt{seagreen}, \texttt{blue} und \texttt{white}. Die Beispielfolien
+entsprechen dem Layout \texttt{brown}.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-jefka.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-jefka.002}
+
+\item\pf{pazik}\\
+Dieser Stil ist in zwei Layouts verwendbar: \texttt{brown} oder auch
+\texttt{red}, wie in der Beispielabbildung.\\
+
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-pazik.001}
+\quad
+\includegraphics[angle={-90},width=5cm]{powerdot-styleexample-pazik.002}
+
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Kompilieren der Präsentation}\label{sec:compiling}
+\subsection{Anforderungen}\label{sec:dependencies}
+In Tabelle \ref{tab:Anforderungen} ist eine Liste von Dateipaketen
+(packages) die \pf{powerdot} verwendet um spezifische Aufgaben
+auszuführen. Bedingungen für die jeweiligen Pakete sind in dieser
+Tabelle jedoch nicht mit aufgeführt. Die Bezeichnung `benötigt'
+meint, dass das verwendete Paket \emph{mindestens} so aktuell sein sollte,
+wie die gelistete Version. Die Bezeichnung `getestet' meint, dass
+\pf{powerdot} mit dieser Paketversion getestet wurde, aber es auch mit
+älteren als der gelisteten Version funktionieren könnte. Tritt bei der
+Programmumwandlung ein Fehler auf, empfiehlt es sich, zur Behebung als
+erstes die Anforderungen an die benötigten Paketversionen zu prüfen. Um zu
+erfahren welche Version eines Pakets aktuell verwendet wird, hilft es den
+Befehl \slash{listfiles} in die erste Zeile des \LaTeX Quelltextes zu setzen,
+die |.log| Datei zu öffnen und die Dateiliste zu lesen (siehe \LaTeX
+Handbuch für mehr Informationen). Nötige Paket-Updates zur Aktualisierung
+sind bei CTAN \cite{CTAN} erhältlich.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{c|c|c|c}
+Paket/Datei & Version & Datum & benötigt/getestet\\\hline
+\pf{xkeyval} \cite{xkeyval} & 2.5c & 2005/07/10 & benötigt\\
+\texttt{pstricks.sty} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} & 0.2l & 2004/05/12 & benötigt\\
+\pf{xcolor} \cite{xcolor} & 1.11 & 2004/05/09 & benötigt\\
+\pf{enumitem} \cite{enumitem} & 1.0 & 2004/07/19 & benötigt\\
+\pf{article} class & 1.4f & 2004/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{geometry} \cite{geometry} & 3.2 & 2002/07/08 & tested\\
+\pf{hyperref} \cite{hyperref} & 6.74m & 2003/11/30 & tested\\
+\pf{graphicx} \cite{graphics} & 1.0f & 1999/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{verbatim} & 1.5q & 2003/08/22 & tested
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Anforderungen}\label{tab:Anforderungen}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Erzeugen und Darstellen der Output-Datei}\label{sec:creation}
+Der Quelltext der Präsentation wird von \LaTeX kompiliert. Die dabei
+erstellte DVI kann mit dem MiK\TeX's DVI Viewer YAP\footnote{Mit Ausnahme
+der Verwendung von \pf{pstricks-add}, welches das DVI-Koordinatensystem
+verfälscht.} angezeigt werden. Leider werden von xdvi und kdvi (kile)
+nicht alle PostScript-Besonderheiten unterstützt. Daher werden diese die
+Präsentation inkorrekt anzeigen. Falls der verwendete DVI Viewer dies
+jedoch dennoch unterstützt, sollte sicher gestellt werden, dass die DVI
+Anzeigeeinstellungen den Einstellungen der Präsentation angepasst sind.
+Im Falle der Verwendung von \texttt{screen} sollte in den DVI Anzeigeeinstellungen
+das Briefpapier- bzw. Dokumentformat gewählt werden. Falls der DVI Viewer
+Benutzereinstellungen für das Seitenformat zulässt, ist die Einstellung
+von 21 mal 28 cm zu verwenden.
+
+Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass bestimmte Projekte die mir PostScript oder
+PDF Programmen erstellt wurden, mit dem DVI Viewer nicht kompatibel sind.
+Beispielsweise werden im Gegensatz zur PostScript-Ausgabe nicht alle Elemente
+angezeigt (wie bei \slash{pause}, siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:overlays}) oder es gibt
+fehlende Verlinkungen im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+
+Wenn man ein PostScript-Dokument erzeugen möchte, startet man die DVI mit
+dvips \emph{ohne eine Einstellung bezüglich des Formats oder der Seitengröße}.
+\pf{Powerdot} wird dann die nötige Information in der DVI-Datei ergänzen,
+die dvips und ps2pdf (ghostscript) hilft, ein angemessenes Dokument zu
+erzeugen. Sollte dies aus bestimmten Gründen nicht funktionieren oder man
+möchte das Seitenformat selbst spezifizieren, sollte man die Option
+\texttt{nopsheader}
+verwenden, welche im Abschnitt ~\ref{sec:setup} beschrieben wird. Das
+PostScript-Dokument könnte schließlich dazu dienen, mit Unterstützung des
+\texttt{psnup}
+Hilfsprogramms mehrfache Folien auf einer Seite zu verwenden.
+
+Um eine PDF Datei für eine Präsentation zu erstellen, kompiliert man die mit
+dvips erstellte PS-Datei mit ps2pdf zum PDF-Dokument. Auch hier \emph{muss keine
+Angabe für Format oder Seitengröße angegeben werden}. Treten dabei Probleme
+auf, ist wieder die Option \texttt{nopsheader} hilfreich, um selber
+Formateinstellungen vornehmen zu können.
+
+\section{Einen eigenen Folien-Stil erstellen}\label{sec:writestyle}
+\subsection{Generelle Informationen}
+
+Es ist nicht schwierig \pf{powerdot} Stilvorlagen zu bearbeiten oder selbst
+zu erstellen. Wenn man einen Stil modifizieren oder einen neuen entwerfen
+will, muss man zunächst die Datei in \TeX\ finden, die als Basis verwendet
+werden soll. Diese Stildateien sind mit \texttt{powerdot-<style\_name>.sty} benannt.
+Die zu bearbeitende Datei ist vorher zu kopieren und um zu benennen um die
+Lizenz\footnote{Die \LaTeX\ Projekt-Lizenz fordert die Umbenennung von
+modifizierten Dateien. Siehe auch \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl}.}
+und Benennungskonflikte zu umgehen. Der neu benannte Stil muss dann dem
+lokalen \TeX\-System ergänzt werden, um ihn verwenden zu können (für mehr
+Informationen siehe \LaTeX\ Distribution).
+
+Nachdem dies beachtet wurde, kann der neue Stil entworfen werden. Dazu ist
+es äußerst hilfreich die Stildateien zu studieren (bspw.
+\texttt{powerdot-default.sty}),
+während man dieses Kapitel liest. So kann man sich ein gutes Beispiel
+zum Inhalt des folgenden Textes heran ziehen.
+
+Ein Stil hat verschiedene Komponenten, welche nun beschrieben werden sollen.
+\begin{description}
+\item\textbf{Identifikation und Pakete}\\
+Dies identifiziert und lädt alle benötigten Pakete in der Präambel einer
+Präsentation. Der Standardstil \pf{default} beinhaltet so etwas wie:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ \ProvidesPackage{powerdot-default}[2005/10/09 v1.2 default style
+ (HA)]
+ \RequirePackage{pifont}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Mehr Informationen über diese Befehle findet man im \LaTeX\ -Handbuch
+\cite{companion}.
+\item\textbf{Layouts oder Farbwahl}\\
+Dieser Abschnitt enthält die Definition der Layouts oder Farben, die in einem
+Stil verwendet werden. \pf{Powerdot} verwendet \pf{xcolor} (über \pf{pstricks}).
+Daher eignet sich, für mehr Informationen für Farben, die \pf{xcolor}
+Dokumentation. Genauere Ausführungen über Layouts zudem in
+Kapitel~\ref{sec:defpals}.
+\item\textbf{Definition von Vorlagen (Templates)}\\
+Hiermit beschäftigen sich die Kapitel~\ref{sec:deftemps}
+bis~\ref{sec:defbg}.
+\item\textbf{Benutzereinstellungen}\\
+Alles was Teil des Stils sein soll, kann hier eingeschlossen sein. Der
+\pf{default} Stil beinhaltet beispielsweise die Definition für die Symbole
+in Listen, wie \texttt{itemize} sowie einige Bereitstellungen für Listen generell
+(umgesetzt mit \slash{pdsetup}, siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). In diesem Teil
+der *.sty-Datei können also Benutzereinstellungen vorgenommen werden, wie
+in Kapitel~\ref{sec:specialtemps} weiter beschrieben.
+\item\textbf{Bereitstellung der Schriftart}\\
+Dies setzt das Schriftdesign fest, welches durch Laden von Paketen umgesetzt
+werden kann, wie beispielsweise \pf{helvet}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Layouts definieren}\label{sec:defpals}
+Die ausdrückliche Definition von Vorlagen wird in Kapitel~\ref{sec:deftemps}
+thematisiert. Hier sei zunächst nur verdeutlicht, dass die Vorlage (Template)
+die Schablone für den Stil einer Folie ist und somit ihr formales Design
+ausmacht. Layouts hingegen sind Farbgruppen in denen ein Stil ausgeführt
+werden kann. Ein Layout ändert demnach nicht das gesamte Design eines Stils.
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pddefinepalettes}}
+Der folgende Befehl dient der Definition des Layouts eines eigenen Stils.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \pddefinepalettes{<name>}{<cmds>}...
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieser Makro (ein Programmcodeteil) funktioniert mit \emph{jeder} geraden Zahl
+obligatorischer Argumente von mindestens zwei. Für jeden <\texttt{name}> eines
+Layouts ist eine Gruppe von <\texttt{commands}> zur Definition möglich. Die
+<\texttt{commands}> können beispielsweise die Farben \texttt{pdcolor1},
+\texttt{pdcolor2}, usw.
+festlegen. Die Festlegung für \texttt{pdcolor1} entspricht dabei der Textfarbe. Die
+gefärbten Layouts können dann auf den Stil einer Folie, die Schablone,
+angewendet werden (siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:deftemps}).
+Zugriff auf die Layouts ist mit dem Key \texttt{palette} für den Befehl
+\slash{pdsetup}
+möglich (siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). Wird kein Layout spezifiziert,
+wird das Design gemäß dem ersten Kompilieren der Präsentation ausfallen.
+Hier nun ein Beispiel zur Definition zweier Layouts.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pddefinepalettes{reds}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{1,0,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.2,0}
+ }{greens}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.1,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.2,1,0}
+ }
+\end{Verbatim}
+In diesem Beispiel dient das Layout \texttt{reds} als Standardfarbgebung für den Stil.
+Mehr Informationen über \slash{definecolor} bietet die Dokumentation zum Paket
+\pf{xcolor} \cite{xcolor}.
+
+Die Verwendung der Farbennamen \texttt{pdcolor2}, \texttt{pdcolor3}, usw. ist nicht
+zwingend nötig. Diese Farben sind jedoch definiert. \pf{Powerdot} verwendet
+sie beispielsweise beim Feature \texttt{randomdots} (siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:glopts}).
+Die Flexibilität ermöglicht weitere Festlegungen für Vorlagen von Folien
+und deren Layouts. Ein Beispiel wie die Möglichkeiten weiter auszuschöpfen
+sind, bietet ein Einblick in den Stil \pf{klope}.
+
+\subsection{Definition von Vorlagen (Templates)}\label{sec:deftemps}
+Die Vorlage umfasst eine Gruppe von Festlegungen für Elemente der Folie
+als auch Festlegungen des Benutzers, welche den visuellen Charakter der
+Präsentation bestimmen. Ein Stil kann mehrere Formelemente enthalten.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \pddefinetemplate[<basis>]{<name>}{<options>}{<commands>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pddefinetemplate}}
+Dies definiert die Umgebung <\texttt{name}>, welche eine Vorlage, bestimmt durch
+die Charakteristika <\texttt{basis}>, <\texttt{options}> und
+<\texttt{commands}> erstellt.
+Diese Elemente werden in den nächsten Kapiteln genauer erläutert.
+
+Sollen verschiedene Vorlagen erstellt werden, die sich nur gering voneinander
+unterscheiden, lohnt es eine <\texttt{basis}> Schablone zu definieren, von welcher
+aus die anderen Varianten erstellt werden. Alle <\texttt{options}> und
+<\texttt{commands}>
+für die neue Vorlage <\texttt{name}> werden der bestehenden Liste von
+<\texttt{options}>
+und <\texttt{commands}> der <\texttt{basis}> Schablone angefügt.
+
+Die Vorlage sollte mit \emph{einem passenden Namen} benannt, die Neubenennung
+bestehender Schablonen oder Umgebungen jedoch vermieden werden.
+\texttt{Blackslide},
+\texttt{note} und \texttt{emptyslide} definiert \pf{powerdot} intern, womit eine Verwendung
+dieser Namen in der Regel vermieden werden sollte. Außerdem besteht jeder
+Designstil aus den Vorlagen \texttt{slide} und \texttt{titleslide}. Die
+\texttt{titleslide} Umgebung
+wird im Standard dazu verwendet, die Titelfolie zu erzeugen während |slide|
+(standardmäßig) für Unterkapitel verwendet wird. Titel und Unterkapitel
+verwenden die <\texttt{options}> auf besondere Weise, was detaillierter in
+Kapitel~\ref{sec:specialtemps} erläutert ist.
+
+\subsection{Steuerung des Setup}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{ifsetup}}
+Nachfolgend sind die <\texttt{options}> (Keys bzw. Parameter) beschrieben.
+Mit dem Key \texttt{ifsetup} kann kontrolliert werden, wie die Optionen auf
+verschiedene Setups (Programmeinrichtungen) angelegt sind. Jeder verwendete
+Key der vor der ersten \texttt{ifsetup} Meldung in <\texttt{options}> auftritt, wird bei
+jedem möglichen Setup befolgt. Die dem Key zugewiesenen Parameter werden
+umgesetzt. Ist der \texttt{ifsetup} Key jedoch einmal verwendet, erfolgt die Anwendung
+der untergeordneten Keys nur auf das deklarierte Setup im \texttt{ifsetup} Key.
+Die Parameter untergeordneter Keys werden demnach nur für das zugewiesene
+Setup beachtet. Dabei kann der \texttt{ifsetup} Key mehrere Male verwendet werden.
+
+Mit möglichen Setups sind die zulässigen Werte für die Optionen gemeint,
+wie passende Werte für die Parameter \texttt{mode}, \texttt{paper},
+\texttt{orient}, und \texttt{display}
+(siehe Kapitel~\ref{sec:classopts}). Wenn ein Wert oder Werte für einen
+dieser vier Keys nicht in einer \texttt{ifsetup} Zuweisung spezifiziert ist, werden
+alle untergeordneten Key-Deklarationen zu einem beliebigen Layout diesen Typs
+angewendet. Man betrachte folgenden Quelltext als Beispiel.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,numbers=left]
+ ...
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.3\slideheight},
+ ifsetup={portrait,screen},
+ textpos={.3\slidewidth,.2\slideheight}
+ ...
+ ifsetup=landscape,
+ ...
+ ifsetup,
+ ...
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Angenommen im Beispiel wäre keine \texttt{ifsetup} Deklaration vor der ersten
+\texttt{textpos} Deklaration, würde der Befehl \texttt{textpos} auf jedes mögliche
+Setup
+angewendet werden. Für das screen-Format in Hochformat (portrait) jedoch,
+wird die nächste \texttt{textpos} Deklaration befolgt. Das heißt alle Befehle die bis
+zum nächsten \texttt{ifsetup} (Zeile 6) ausgeführt werden, werden für Hochformat
+(portrait) umgesetzt. Alle Keys nach diesem \texttt{ifsetup} gelten für Querformat
+(landscape), wobei \emph{paper, mode und display nicht spezifiziert sind}.
+Wenn man nach einer Spezifikation von Keys zu den Optionen zurück möchte,
+die auf alle Setups angewendet werden, deklariert man \texttt{ifsetup} ohne weitere
+Parameter (Zeile 8). Alle nachfolgenden Deklarationen werden nun wieder für
+jedes mögliche Setup befolgt.
+
+Der folgende Befehl ist eine unabhängige Anwendung des zuvor beschriebenen
+Mechanismus. Er erlaubt die Kontrolle des Setups außerhalb des Arguments
+<\texttt{options}> des \slash{pddefinetemplate} Befehls.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \pdifsetup{<desired>}{<true>}{<false>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pdifsetup}}
+Dieser Makro (Programmcodeteil) entscheidet <\texttt{true}> wenn die
+Programmeinrichtung des Benutzers, sei Setup, mit dem verlangten
+<\texttt{desired}>
+Setup überein stimmt. In allen anderen Fällen gilt <\texttt{false}>. Wurde
+beispielsweise landscape (Querformat) gewählt, dann gilt bei
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \pdifsetup{landscape}{yes}{no}
+\end{Verbatim}
+"'yes"'. Wurde jedoch statt dessen portrait (Hochformat) gewählt, würde nein,
+bzw. "`no"' gelten.
+
+Dieser Makro kann genutzt werden um die Setupanforderungen zu überprüfen und
+um zum Beispiel ein Error zu generieren, wenn eine bestimmte
+Programmeinrichtung vom Stil nicht unterstützt wird. \pf{Powerdot} bietet
+eine vorverfasste Error-Nachricht, welche in den ersten Zeilen des
+Quelltextes der Stildatei verwendet werden kann.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \pd@noportrait
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@noportrait}}
+Dieser Makro generiert ein Error wenn der Benutzer Hochformat abfragt. An
+dieser Stelle sei darauf hingewiesen, dass ein eventueller Handout-Modus nur
+in Hochformat möglich ist. Dieser Makro berücksichtigt dies jedoch und
+generiert bei Abfrage eines Handouts kein Error.
+
+\subsection{Hauptkomponenten}\label{sec:maincomps}
+
+Die <\texttt{options}> kontrollieren verschiedene Key-Komponenten einer Folie.
+Jede Komponente hat verschiedene Einzelteile mit jew. Eigenschaften. Ein Key
+der für das <\texttt{options}> Argument verwendet werden kann ist die Bezeichnung
+der Komponente. Zum Beispiel benannt nach ihrer Eigenschaft, die kontrolliert
+werden soll.
+
+Die Komponenten\texttt{itle}, \texttt{text}, \texttt{toc}, \texttt{stoc}
+und \texttt{ntoc} haben die Einzelteile
+bzw. Eigenschaften \texttt{hook}, \texttt{pos}, \texttt{width} und
+\texttt{font}. Zudem hat die Komponente
+\texttt{text} die Eigenschaft \texttt{height}, die Komponenten \texttt{lf}
+und \texttt{rf} die
+Eigenschaften \texttt{hook}, \texttt{pos}, \texttt{temp} und \texttt{font}.
+Eigenschaften
+für gültige
+Keys sind daher \texttt{titlefont}, \texttt{tocpos} und \texttt{lftemp}. Diese
+Komponenten
+und ihre Einzelteile sollen nun erläutert werden.
+
+Vom <\texttt{options}> Argument in \slash{pddefinetemplate} kontrollierte Komponenten
+sind:
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{title-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{title-}]
+Betrifft den Titel der Folie.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{text-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{text-}]
+Betrifft die Box für den Haupttext auf der Folie.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{toc-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{toc-}]
+
+Betrifft das vollständige Inhaltsverzeichnis
+einschließlich der Unterkapitel und Folien.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{stoc-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{stoc-}]
+
+Dieses Inhaltsverzeichnis umfasst nur die
+Unterkapitel "`sections"' (siehe auch \texttt{ntoc}).
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{ntoc-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{ntoc-}]
+
+Dies ist ein Inhaltsverzeichnis, welches nur
+die Einträge des aktuellen
+Kapitels anzeigt. Zusammen mit \texttt{stoc} kann es als ein gesplittetes
+Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet werden. Beispielsweise mit Überblick über die
+Kapitel im einen und mit den Unterpunkten des jeweiligen Kapitels im anderen
+Verzeichnis. In einer einzelnen Folienvorlage ist \texttt{toc} nützlicher, eine
+Kombination von \texttt{stoc} und \texttt{ntoc} oder überhaupt kein Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{lf-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{lf-}]
+
+Betrifft die linke Fußnote bzw. Eingabefeld.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{rf-}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{rf-}]
+
+Betrifft die rechte Fußnote bzw. Eingabefeld.
+\end{description}
+
+Angemerkt sei, dass alle Komponenten die bisher beschrieben wurden, mit
+\slash{rput} von \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} eingebracht werden.
+Die Dokumentation zu \pf{pstricks} gibt mehr Informationen zu diesem Befehl.
+Zudem sollte zur Kenntnis genommen werden, dass alle Komponenten (außer
+\texttt{lf} und \texttt{rf}) ihren Inhalt in eine \texttt{minipage} Umgebung setzen.
+
+Nun werden alle Einzelteile bzw. Eigenschaften der zuvor genannten
+Komponenten mit ihrer Bedeutung gelistet. Es ist daran zu denken,
+dass Keys aus der Kombination einer Komponente und einer Eigenschaft bestehen.
+
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-hook}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-hook}]
+
+Diese Option definiert den \slash{rput} Anker, welcher bei der Positionierung
+eines Item verwendet wird. Dieser kann sein: \texttt{tl}, \texttt{t},
+\texttt{tr}, \texttt{r}, \texttt{Br}, \texttt{br},
+\texttt{b}, \texttt{bl}, \texttt{Bl}, \texttt{l}, \texttt{B} und \texttt{c}. Die
+\pf{pstricks} Dokumentation bietet hier zu weitere Informationen.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-pos}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-pos}]
+
+Dies definiert die Position des \texttt{hook}. Die linke, untere Ecke des "`Papiers"'
+entspricht dem Punkt |{0,0}| und die rechte, obere Ecke dem Punkt
+\texttt{\{\slash{slidewidth},\slash{slideheight}\}}. Soll die Box für den Haupttext
+20\% vom linken
+Rand und 30\% vom oberen Rand entfernt sein, ergibt sich folgender Key:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.7\slideheight}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Wenn die Position einer Komponente nicht spezifiziert wurde, wird die
+Komponente nicht auf der Folie platziert. Dies ermöglicht es Folien zu
+entwerfen, die in einem nüchtern Stil ohne Fußnoten oder Inhaltsverzeichnis
+gehalten sind.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-width}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-width}]
+
+Bezieht sich auf die Breite der Komponente. Alle Komponenten, die \pf{powerdot} positioniert,
+werden in eine \texttt{minipage} Umgebung gesetzt. Die Eigenschaft
+\texttt{width} bestimmt
+die Breite des Einsatzfeldes \texttt{minipage}. Zum Beispiel:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ textwidth=.7\slidewidth
+\end{Verbatim}
+Für \texttt{lf} und \texttt{rf} Komponenten gibt es diese Eigenschaft nicht.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-height}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-height}]
+
+Diese Option ist nur für die Komponente \texttt{text} verfügbar. Oder anders: Für
+diese Eigenschaft gibt es nur eine Verwendung, nämlich den Key
+\texttt{textheight}.
+Damit kann die Höhe der \texttt{minipage} spezifiziert werden, welche als
+Haupttextfenster dient. Diese Höhe dient jedoch nur für die vertikale
+Angleichung von Material auf der Folie, wie beispielsweise Fußnoten. Nicht
+aber für die Länge oder den automatischen Folienumsprung durch \pf{powerdot}
+bei vollen Textfenstern. Der vorbestimmte Wert ist \slash{slideheight}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-font}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-font}]
+
+Dies wird im Quelltext kurz vor den betroffenen Text gesetzt, dessen
+Schriftsatz definiert werden soll. Mit dem Befehl können so Abweichungen
+des Textes in Schriftart und Farbe vorgenommen werden. Dies kann als
+Schriftsatzdeklaration umgesetzt werden, wie \slash{large}slash{\bfseries}, aber auch
+mit anderen Inhalten wie \slash{color}\{\texttt{red}\} oder
+\slash{raggedright}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-temp}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-temp}]
+
+Diese Eigenschaft ist nur für Fußnoten (\texttt{lf} und \texttt{rf}) verfügbar und
+kann
+verwendet werden um deren Schablone in der Vorlage zu ändern. Beispielsweise
+kann Inhalt durch den Benutzer hinzugefügt werden. Die Standard-Deklaration
+bei \pf{powerdot} ist folgende:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty
+ \else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else~--~\fi\fi\theslide
+\end{Verbatim}
+\slash{pd@@rf} wird hier den Inhalt des rechten Eingabefeldes umfassen, definiert
+durch den Benutzer, entgegen dem \slash{pdsetup} Befehl. Ähnlich beinhaltet
+\slash{pd@@rf} den Inhalt des linken Eingabefeldes. Der obige Befehl kontrolliert
+ob das Eingabefeld und \slash{theslide} Inhalte haben. Wenn dem so ist, wird
+\texttt{$\sim$--$\sim$} eingesetzt, um sie zu unterscheiden.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{-orient}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{-orient}]
+
+Diese Eigenschaft ist nur für die Komponenten \texttt{toc}, \texttt{stoc}
+und \texttt{ntoc}
+verfügbar. Es stehen die Alternativen \texttt{h} oder \texttt{v} zur Auswahl, um die
+horizontale oder vertikale Ausrichtung des Inhaltsverzeichnisses zu
+bestimmen. Die Voreinstellung entspricht \texttt{v}. Bezüglich dem Anlegen des
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses liefert Kapitel~\ref{sec:slidetoc} weitere Informationen.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Das Folieninhaltsverzeichnis }\label{sec:slidetoc}
+
+Das kleine Inhaltsverzeichnis auf den Folien kann durch vier Makros und mehrere
+Optionen gesteuert werden.
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@tocslide}}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@tocsection}}
+
+Diese Makros nehmen ein Argument an. Beim Erstellen des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
+durchläuft
+\pf{powerdot} den Inhalt mittels \slash{pd@tocslide} oder
+\slash{pd@tocsection}, je nach dem welcher Eingabetyp gerade erstellt wird.
+Sie können beispielsweise
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \def\pd@tocslide#1{$\bullet$\ #1}
+ \def\pd@tocsection#1{#1}
+\end{Verbatim}
+eingeben, wodurch alle normalen Eingaben (nicht die Abschnitte) mit einem
+"`Bullet"' präfigiert werden. Diese beiden Makros sind standardmäßig so definiert,
+dass sie sich genau auf ihre jeweiligen Argumente übertragen.
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@tocsisplay}}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@tochighlight}}
+
+Diese zwei Makros nehmen ebenfalls ein Argument. Nachdem die Eingabe mit dem
+Befehl \slash{pd@tocslide} oder \slash{pd@tocsection} bearbeitet wurde, setzt
+\pf{power\-dot}
+das Erstellen der Eingabe mit Durchlaufen von \slash{pd@tocdisplay} fort,
+wenn die Eingabe nur angezeigt werden muss oder von \slash{pd@tochighlight},
+wenn die Eingabe hervorgehoben werden muss.
+Diese Makros sind überwiegend beteiligt und betreuen das Erstellen des Inhalts in
+angemessener Schriftart und Farbe in einer \texttt{minipage}. Des Weiteren setzt
+\slash{pd@tochighlight} eine Box um die Einheit.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass beispielsweise beide, zum einem die Eingabe des gesonderten
+Inhaltsverzeichnis, genauso wie das Inhaltsverzeichnis als Ganzes in einer
+\texttt{minipage} Umgebung von diesen Makros gesetzt sind, in dem Fall, dass das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis vertikal angelegt ist. Die \texttt{-width}-Bestandteile
+determinieren dann die Breite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses und zusammen mit
+\texttt{tocsecindent} und
+\texttt{tocslideindent} (siehe unten) die Breite der individuellen Eingaben. Wenn
+es horizontal ist, sind nur die gesonderten Eingaben und nicht das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis an sich in der \texttt{minipage}.
+ Die \texttt{-width}-Bestandteile
+determinieren nur die Breite der individuellen Eingaben (zusammen mit
+\texttt{tocsecindent} und \texttt{tocslideindent}).
+
+Mehrere Aspekte des Prozesses des Anlegens des Inhaltsverzeichnisses können durch
+Schlüssel gesteuert werden, die im Befehl
+\slash{pddefinetemplate} abrufbar sind, die dann unten beschrieben werden. Falls
+diese Schlüssel nicht genug Spielraum bereitstellen um tun zu können, was Sie
+möchten, müssen Sie vielleicht einen Blick auf die zwei Makros in der Quelle werfen
+und sich entscheiden diese in ihrem Stil neu zu schreiben, bis sie zu ihren
+Bedürfnissen passen. Ein Beispiel finden Sie im
+\pf{fyma} Stil.
+
+\begin{description}
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\ \texttt{tocfrsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocfrsep}]
+
+Diese Länge ist der Abstand zwischen der Box, die den Inhalt umgibt, die von der
+\texttt{minipage} kreiert wurde und der hervorgehobenen Rahmenbox, kreiert durch
+\slash{pd@tochighlight}. Voreingestellt: \texttt{0.5mm}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocsecsep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsecsep}]
+
+Dieser Abstand ist vor einem Abschnitt eingefügt (ausgenommen es ist das erste
+Element in dem Inhaltsverzeichnis). Voreingestellt: \texttt{2ex}.
+Beachten Sie, dass wenn die Orientierung des Inhaltsverzeichnisses auf vertikal
+gesetzt ist, die Länge eine vertikale Auslassung kreiert, anderenfalls kreiert es
+eine horizontale Auslassung.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocslidesep}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocslidesep}]
+
+Der Abstand ist vor anderen Eingaben eingefügt (ausgenommen es ist das erste Element
+in dem Inhaltsverzeichnis). Voreingestellt: \texttt{0ex}. Wie
+\texttt{tocsecsep} ist der Effekt der Länge abhängig von der Ausrichtung des
+Inhaltsverzeichnisses.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocsecindent}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsecindent}]
+
+Ein horizontales Leerfeld links von der Abschnitteingabe. Voreingestellt:
+\texttt{0pt}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocslideindent}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocslideindent}]
+
+Ein horizontales Leerfeld links von der Folieneingabe. Die horizontale Auslassung
+wird nicht links von der Folieneingabe eingefügt, die vor dem ersten Abschnitt
+erscheint. Voreingestellt: \texttt{0pt}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tocsecm}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tocsecm}]
+
+Dies wird vor dem Schrift setzen eines Abschnitts eingefügt. Es kann zum Markieren
+eines Abschnitts verwendet werden, zum Beispiel mit einer Linie im \pf{default}
+Stil. Voreingestellt ist: empty.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{toccolor}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{toccolor}]
+
+Dies ist die Schriftfarbe, benutzt für nicht hervorgehobene Elemente
+im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Voreingestellt: \texttt{black}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tochltcolor}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tochltcolor}]
+
+Dies ist die Schriftfarbe, benutzt für hervorgehobene Elemente im
+Inhaltsverzeichnis. Voreingestellt: \texttt{white}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{tochlcolor}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{tochlcolor}]
+
+Die ist die Farbe, benutzt für den Rahmen hinter den hervorgehobenen Elementen.
+Voreingestellt: \texttt{black}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Sonstige Optionen}\label{sec:miscoptions}
+
+Es gibt einige Optionen, die aus den Rahmen der vorherigen Abschnitte fallen. Diese
+werden im Folgenden besprochen.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{iacolor}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{iacolor}]
+
+Die Option \texttt{iacolor} können Sie benutzen, um die Farbe, die für inaktive
+Symbole genutzt wird, zu spezifizieren. Sie wird beispielsweise durch
+\slash{onslide}, \slash{pause}
+(siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:overlays}) und \slash{tableofcontents} (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:tableofcontents}). Wenn \pf{xcolor} von
+\pf{powerdot} verwendet wird, können Sie hierbei spezielle Darstellungsarten wählen,
+wie
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ iacolor=black!20
+\end{Verbatim}
+Der voreingestellte Wert für diesen Schlüssel ist \texttt{lightgray}.
+
+Die folgenden Optionen steuern die Digitaluhr (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:classopts}). Die Uhr ist ein gestaltbares Textfeld mit einem
+dynamischen Inhalt, was durch javaskript über \pf{hyperref} Textfelder gesteuert
+wird.
+Einige Optionen arbeiten ähnlich, wie zum Beispiel für den Titelbaustein, aber es
+gibt ebenfalls spezielle Optionen.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clockhook//clockpos}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockhook} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockpos}]
+
+Diese arbeiten auf die gleiche Weise wie die \texttt{-hook} und
+\texttt{-pos} Bestandteile,
+die in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:maincomps}diskutiert wurden. Der voreingestellte Wert der
+\texttt{clockhook} ist \texttt{tr}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clockwidth\\clockheight}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockwidth} \quad
+\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockheight}]
+
+Diese steuern die Breite und die Höhe des Textfeldes, das die Uhr beinhaltet. Die
+voreingestellten Werte kommen von \pf{hyperref} und haben ein Maß von
+\texttt{3cm} beziehungsweise von \slash{baselineskip}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clockcharsize}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockcharsize}]
+
+Die Größe der Ziffern auf der Uhr. Voreingestellt ist \texttt{14pt}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clockalign}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockalign}]
+
+Die Ausrichtung der Uhr im Textfeld. \texttt{0} ist links ausgerichtet,
+\texttt{1} ist zentriert und \texttt{2} ist rechts ausgerichtet. Voreingestellt
+ist \texttt{2}.
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{clockcolor}}
+\item[\fcolorbox{black}{gray!30}{clockcolor}]
+
+Dies legt die Schriftfarbe der Uhr fest. Der Wert muss eine bestimmte Farbe sein.
+Der voreingestellte Wert ist \texttt{black}.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Voreingestellte Templates}
+
+Unten werden die voreingestellten Einstellungen der Schlüssel beschrieben. Diese
+können benutzt werden, wenn Sie keinen anderen Input für diese Schlüssel in eine
+bestimmte Schablone liefern. Wenn die voreingestellten Werte Ihre Bedürfnisse
+erfüllen, brauchen Sie diese nicht noch einmal in Ihrem eigenen Stil spezifizieren.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ titlehook=Bl,titlepos=,titlewidth=\slidewidth,
+ titlefont=\raggedright,texthook=tl,textpos=,
+ textwidth=\slidewidth,textfont=\raggedright,
+ textheight=\slideheight,
+ tochook=tl,tocpos=,tocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ stochook=tl,stocpos=,stocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ stocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ ntochook=tl,ntocpos=,ntocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ tocorient=v,stocorient=v,ntocorient=v,
+ tocfrsep=.5mm,tocsecsep=2ex,tocslidesep=0ex,
+ tocsecm=,toctcolor=black,tochlcolor=black,tochltcolor=white,
+ tocsecindent=0pt,tocslideindent=0pt,
+ lfhook=Bl,lfpos=,lffont=\scriptsize,lftemp=\pd@@lf,
+ rfhook=Br,rfpos=,rffont=\scriptsize,rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty
+ \else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else~--~\fi\fi\theslide,
+ iacolor=lightgray,
+ clockhook=tr,clockpos=,clockwidth=3cm,clockheight=\baselineskip,
+ clockcharsize=14pt,clockalign=2,clockcolor=black
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Der Hintergrund}\label{sec:defbg}
+
+Nur ein Argument von dem Makro \slash{pddefinetemplate} ist noch unbesprochen. Die ist
+das <\textsl{Befehls}> (<\textsl{commands}>) Argument.
+Dieses Argument kann jeden Code einbinden, den Sie ausführen möchten,
+\textit{nachdem} die Optionen gesetzt wurden und \textit{bevor} die Folienbausteine
+wie der Folientitel, Haupttext und Fußnoten erstellt wurden. Dieses Argument ist
+konstruiert, um Deklarationen einzubinden, die den Hintergrund einer Folie erstellen
+und zum Beispiel \pf{pstricks} benutzen. Aber es kann auch andere Befehle enthalten,
+die Sie zum Erstellen Ihrer Schablone brauchen.
+
+Es ist wichtig festzuhalten, dass diese Befehle nicht unbedingt \TeX\
+Material kreieren, das Ihre Konstruktion der Folie zerstören könnte. Falls Sie das
+Wort "`Hallo"' in der unteren linke Ecke der Folie platzieren möchten,
+schreiben Sie nicht "`Hallo"', legen Sie aber die Breite, Höhe und Tiefe gleich der
+Null, zum Beispiel mit der Benutzung von \pf{pstricks}' \slash{rput}.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \rput[bl](0,0){Hello}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Titelfolie, Titel und Abschnitte}\label{sec:specialtemps}
+
+Wie zuvor erwähnt, muss der Stil, in dem Sie schreiben, definiert werden und damit
+zuletzt die Schablonen \texttt{slide} und \texttt{titleslide}. Letzteres behandelt
+einige der Schlüssel in einer speziellen Weise.
+
+Die Titelfolie (erstellt durch \slash{maketitle}) setzt den Titel mit den Autor/en
+und das Datum in die Haupttextbox. Dies bedeutet, dass Sie eine Position für die
+Haupttextbox (\texttt{textpos})liefern müssen. Die Haupttextschriftgröße (zusammen
+mit den Erklärungen in dem
+\texttt{textfont} Schlüssel) wird für Autor/en und Datum benutzt. Die Erklärung wird
+aber in \texttt{titlefont} für den Titel der Präsentation gebraucht. Dadurch formen
+Titel und Autor/en einen zusammenhängenden Block und es wird sichergestellt, dass
+lange Titel Autor/en nach unten verschieben, anstatt ihn zu überschreiben
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@slidetitle}}
+Das Makro \slash{pd@slidetitle} wird verwendet, um den Folientitel auf die Folien zu setzen.
+Dieses Makro ist zum Beispiel mit \slash{pd@tocslide} vergleichbar. Es nimmt ein Argument an,
+das den Folientitel mit der richtigen Schriftart und Formation hat. Standardmäßig passt dieses
+Makro den Inhalt für das Schriftsetzen an, aber Sie können dieses Makro umdefinieren und somit
+seinem früheren Input erstellen um die Schrift zu setzen. Ein Beispiel ist der
+\pf{fyma} Stil, der den Titel unterstreicht, nachdem er in eine
+|minipage|gesetzt wurde und der den Mehrfachlinientitel unterstützt.
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pd@sectiontitle}}
+Diese Makros haben Ähnlichkeit zu \... und setzen den Titel auf die Titelfolie bzw. den Titel
+auf die Abschnittsfolien. Standardmäßig bestehen diese ebenso aus ihrem Argument (was der
+Titel der Präsentation oder der Titel eines Abschnitts ist). Aber dies kann auch umdefiniert
+werden um so den früheren Input zu erstellen und so die Schrift zu setzen, wie bei
+\slash{pd@slidetitle}.
+
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{sectemp}}
+
+\marginpar{\textsl{option}\\\texttt{widesectemp}}
+
+Der Befehl \slash{section} benutzt (standardmäßig) die \texttt{slide} Umgebung und setzt den
+Abschnittstitel in die Titelbox mit der Schriftart \texttt{titlefont}. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel
+diesen Standard ändern möchten und die \texttt{slide} Umgebung, die
+\texttt{sectionslide} Umgebung oder eine beliebige eigens kreierte Abschnittschablone auch für
+die Abschnitte nutzen möchten, ändern Sie die voreingestellte Schablone in Ihrem Stil mit
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Die bedeutet, dass bei der Forderung des Benutzers nach
+\texttt{template=slide} in dem Befehl
+\slash{section} die \texttt{sectionslide} Umgebung stillschweigend benutzt wird. Um
+Ãœberraschungen zu vermeiden sollte \texttt{sectionslide} vorzugsweise auf
+der \texttt{slide} Umgebung basieren.
+
+Eine ähnliche Option ist verfügbar in dem Fall, dass der Benutzer \\
+\texttt{template=wideslide} fordert. Beispielsweise die Folgende:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Jedes Mal wenn der Benutzer ein \texttt{wideslide} anfordert, gebraucht für
+\slash{section}, wird stattdessen die \texttt{sectionwideslide} Umgebung benutzt. Bei
+anderen Inputs für den Schablonenschlüssel erfolgt keine spezielle Bearbeitung.
+
+Beachten Sie, dass diese Schlüssel in den \texttt{section} Gruppenschlüsseln verfügbar sind
+und dass Sie diese nicht für den Befehl \slash{pddefinetemplate} verwenden können.
+
+\subsection{Das Testen des Stils}\label{sec:styletest}
+
+\pf{powerdot} hat eine Testdatei, die die meisten Stile testet. Die Testdatei kann
+angefertigt werden, indem \LaTeX\ über
+\texttt{powerdot.dtx} läuft. Diese generiert\\
+\texttt{powerdot-styletest.tex} , was Ihnen hilft die Eingaben zu kontrollieren.
+Wenden Sie sich an uns, wenn Sie Ihren Stil \pf{powerdot} beisteuern möchten. Siehe
+ebenfalls Abschnitt~\ref{sec:questions}.
+
+\section{Die Benutzung von \LyX\ für Präsentationen}\label{sec:lyx}
+
+\LyX\ \cite{LyXWeb} ist ein WYSIWYM (What You See Is What You Mean)
+Dokumentprozessor basierend auf \LaTeX. Es unterstützt \LaTeX\
+Standardklassen, braucht aber spezielle Dateien, genannt Layout-Dateien, um nicht
+standardisierte Klassen, wie \pf{powerdot} zu unterstützen.
+
+Um \LyX\ für \pf{powerdot} Präsentationen zu verwenden, kopieren Sie die
+Layout-Datei \texttt{powerdot.layout} in das \LyX\ Layout-Datenverzeichnis. Diese Datei finden Sie
+in Ihrem \LaTeX\ Installationsverzeichnis unter dem Pfad:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. Falls Sie ihn hier nicht finden, können Sie ihn auch von CTAN
+herunterladen \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. Sobald dies getan ist,
+rekonfigurieren Sie \LyX\ (\texttt{Edit}$\rhd$\texttt{Reconfigure} und
+starten Sie \LyX\ danach neu). Jetzt können Sie die \pf{powerdot}
+Dokumentenklasse wie eine beliebige andere unterstützte Klasse benutzen. Wählen Sie
+\texttt{Layout}$\rhd$\texttt{Document} und wählen Sie \texttt{powerdot
+presentation} als Dokumentenklasse aus. Für mehr Informationen schauen Sie in die \LyX\
+Dokumentation, die unter dem \texttt{Hilfemenü} abrufbar ist.
+
+\subsection{Wie das Layout benutzt wird}
+
+Das \pf{powerdot} \LyX\ Layout bietet einige Umgebungen\footnote{Nicht
+mit den \LaTeX\ Umgebungen verwechseln.}, die in \LyX\ verwendet werden können.
+Manche dieser Umgebungen (beispielsweise \texttt{Title} oder
+\texttt{Itemize})
+ sind normal nutzbar seit sie ebenfalls in Standarddokumentenklassen wie \pf{article}
+ existieren. Mehr Informationen über die Standardumgebungen sind in der \LyX\ Dokumentation
+ zu finden.
+
+Dieser Abschnitt will Ihnen erklären, wie die speziellen \pf{powerdot} Umgebungen
+\texttt{Slide}, \texttt{WideSlide}, \texttt{EmptySlide} und \texttt{Note} benutzt werden.
+Diese Umgebungen entsprechen der \pf{powerdot} Umgebung \texttt{slide},
+\texttt{emptyslide}, \texttt{wideslide} und \texttt{note}.
+
+Begonnen wird mit einem einfachen Beispiel. Der folgende \LaTeX\ Code
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{Slide title}
+ Slide content.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+ist bei der Benutzung der folgenden \LyX\ Umgebungen erhältlich. Die rechte Spalte
+repräsentiert den Text eingegeben in das \LyX\ Fenster und die linke Spalte repräsentiert die
+Umgebung angewandt auf diesen Text.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ Slide Slide title
+ Standard Slide content.
+ EndSlide
+\end{Verbatim}
+Einige Anmerkungen, bezogen auf dieses Beispiel.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Sie können dieses Umgebungsmenü (unter dem Menübalken, oberere linke Ecke) verwenden, um
+die Umgebung angewandt auf diesen Text zu wechseln.
+\item Der Folientitel sollte in der Zeile der \texttt{Slide}
+Umgebung geschrieben werden.
+\item \texttt{EndSlide} beendet die Folie und lässt die Linie unbeschrieben.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In dem \LyX\ Fenster liegt die \texttt{Slide} Umgebung (der Folientitel) in magenta aus,
+der \texttt{WideSlide} Stil in grün, der
+\texttt{EmptySlide} Stil in cyan und der \texttt{Note} Stil in rot und daher sind diese
+leicht identifizierbar.
+
+Hier ist ein anderes Beispiel.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \begin{slide}{First slide title}
+ The first slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{First note title}
+ The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ \end{note}
+ \begin{slide}{Second slide title}
+ The second slide.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Das lässt sich im \LyX\ folgendermaßen erstellen.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ Note First note title
+ Standard The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ Slide Second slide title
+ Standard The second slide.
+ EndSlide
+\end{Verbatim}
+Dieses Beispiel demonstriert, dass es oft genügt den
+\texttt{EndSlide} Stil nach der letzten Folie oder Notiz einzufügen. Nur wenn Sie bestimmtes
+Material nicht als Teil einer Folie wollen, müssen Sie die vorausgehende Folie manuell mit
+dem \texttt{EndSlide} Stil beenden. Beispiel:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ EndSlide
+ [ERT box with some material]
+ Slide Second slide title
+ ...
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+Optionen können für Folienumgebungen mit der Benutzung von
+\texttt{Insert}$\rhd$\texttt{Short title} vor dem Folientitel übermittelt werden. Das folgende
+Beispiel gebraucht die \texttt{direkte} Methode (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:verbatim}) im Kurztitel-Argument (begrenzt durch einen eckigen Bereich) um
+eine \texttt{lstlisting} Umgebung (definiert vom
+dem \pf{listings} Packet) binnen des Folieninhalts zu erstellen.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ Slide [method=direct]Example of LaTeX source code
+ Standard Here's the \HelloWorld command:
+ [ERT box:
+ \lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+ \newcommand{\HelloWorld}{Hello World!}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ ]
+ EndSlide
+\end{Verbatim}
+Beachten Sie, dass Sie nicht verpflichtet sind eine \texttt{verbatim} Umgebung zu nutzen,
+um \slash{HelloWord} in das \LyX\ Fenster zu schreiben, weil \LyX\
+direkt einen wörtlichen Standard unterstützt.\footnote{\LyX\ übersetzt
+spezielle Zeichen in ihren dazugehörigen \LaTeX\ Befehl. Zum
+Beispiel das backslash Zeichen ist in
+\slash{textbackslash} übersetzt. Resultierend, ist die Schriftart nicht die gleiche wie in der
+wahren wörtgetreuen Übersetzung und Sie könnten dies durch den
+\texttt{Layout}$\rhd$\texttt{Character} Dialog ändern.}. Folglich ist die Benutzung der Methoden
+der Folienaufbereitung \texttt{direct} und \texttt{file} nicht notwendig, wenn Sie einen
+wörtlichen Standard gebrauchen, aber es ist notwendig, wenn Sie fortgeschrittene Dinge tun
+möchten, wie im obigen Beispiel.
+
+\subsection{Unterstützung der Syntax}
+Dieser Abschnitt listet Optionen, Befehle und Umgebungen auf, die durch das \LyX\ Interface
+direkt unterstützt werden, ohne eine ERT-Box zu benutzen (\TeX-mode).
+
+Alle Optionsklassen (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:classopts}) werden durch
+den \texttt{Layout}$\rhd$\texttt{Document} Dialog unterstützt(\texttt{Layout} Ausschnitt).
+Optionen für den Befehl \slash{pdsetup}(siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:setup})
+sollten in dem Präambel \texttt{Preamble} Ausschnitt des
+\texttt{Layout}$\rhd$\texttt{Document} Dialog spezifiziert werden.
+
+Tabelle drei \ref{tab:lyxcommands} listet die \pf{powerdot} Befehle auf, die
+in \LyX unterstützt werden.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{l|p{7.5cm}}
+Befehl & Methode in \LyX\\\hline
+\slash{title} & Benutzt \texttt{Title} Umgebung.\\
+\slash{author} & Benutzt \texttt{Author} Umgebung.\\
+\slash{date} & Benutzt \texttt{Date} Umgebung.\\
+\slash{maketitle} & direkt von \LyX ausgeführt.\\
+\slash{section} & Benutzt die \texttt{Section} Umgebung. Optionen für diesen
+Befehl (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:section}) können durch
+\texttt{Insert}$\rhd$\texttt{Short title} vor dem Abschnittstitel spezifiziert werden.\\
+\slash{tableofcontents} & Sie benutzen \texttt{Insert}$\rhd$\texttt{Lists \&
+TOC}$\rhd$\texttt{Table of contents} und brauchen eine ERT-Box, wenn sie ein optionales Argument
+benutzen möchten. Siehe unten.
+\end{tabular}
+
+\caption{Unterstützt \pf{powerdot} Befehle in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxcommands}
+\end{table}
+
+Table \ref{tab:lyxenvs} listet die \pf{powerdot}Umgebungen auf, die neben den vorher diskutierten
+\texttt{slide}, \texttt{wideslide}, \texttt{note} und
+\texttt{emptyslide} Umgebungen auch in \LyX unterstützt werden.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{l|p{8cm}}
+Umgebung & Methode in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{itemize} & Benutzt \texttt{Itemize} und \texttt{ItemizeType1}
+Umgebungen. Letzteres wird eine Liste mit \texttt{type=1} kreieren (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lists}).\\
+\texttt{enumerate} & Benutzt \texttt{Enumerate} und
+\texttt{EnumerateType1} Umgebungen.\\
+\texttt{thebibliography} & Benutzt \texttt{Bibliography} Umgebung.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Unterstützt \pf{powerdot} Umgebungen in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxenvs}
+\end{table}
+Table \ref{tab:lyxERT} listet Befehle auf, die nur bei Benutzung der ERT-Box(durch
+\texttt{Insert}$\unrhd$\texttt{TeX})durchgeführt werden können.
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{l|p{8cm}}
+Befehl & Methode in \LyX\\\hline
+\slash{and} & innerhalb der \texttt{Author} Umgebung.\\
+\slash{pause} & \\
+\slash{item} & eine ERT-Box ist nur erforderlich für das optionale Argument, nicht obligatorisch für
+Overlay-Spezifikationen.\\
+\slash{onslide} & Und die Versionen \slash{onslide+} und \slash{onslide*}.\\
+\slash{twocolumn} & \\
+\slash{tableofcontents} & nur bei der Benutzung eines optionalen Arguments.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\pf{powerdot} Befehle, die eine ERT-Box in \LyX benötigen}\label{tab:lyxERT}
+\end{table}
+Beachten Sie, dass Sie die Ablage gebrauchen dürfen, um häufige Befehle, wie
+\slash{pause} zu wiederholen. Schließlich listet Tabelle \ref{tab:lyxadd} zusätzliche Befehle und Umgebungen
+auf, die vom Layout unterstützt werden.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{l|p{8cm}}
+Env./Befehl & Methode in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{quote} & Benutzt \texttt{Quote} Umgebung.\\
+\texttt{quotation} & Benutzt \texttt{Quotation} Umgebung.\\
+\texttt{verse} & Benutzt \texttt{Verse} Umgebung.\\
+\slash{caption} & Benutzt \texttt{Caption} Umgebung innerhalb einer Standardpufferumgebung.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{zusätzliche Umgebungen für \LyX}\label{tab:lyxadd}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Programmübersetzung mit \LyX}
+Zuerst stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie auch
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling} gelesen haben. Dann, um ein einwandfreies
+PostScript-Dokument oder eine PDF-Datei zu bekommen, müssen Sie Ihre \LyX\ Dokumentbestandteile,
+abhängig davon
+welches Papier und welche Ausrichtung Sie bevorzugen, anpassen und auswählen.
+Wenn das \LyX\ geöffnet ist, gehen Sie zu \texttt{Layout}$\rhd$\texttt{Document} Dialog. In dem
+\texttt{Layout} Ausschnitt setzen Sie die \texttt{nopsheader},
+\texttt{orient} und \texttt{paper} Schlüssel als Klassenoptionen (siehe
+Abschnitt~\ref{sec:classopts} für eine Beschreibung). Gehen Sie dann zum
+\texttt{Paper} Ausschnitt und wählen Sie die dementsprechende Papiergröße und Ausrichtung (Sie
+können \texttt{letter} Papiergröße auswählen, im Fall dass Sie
+\texttt{paper=screen} in
+der Klassenoption setzen). Schließlich gehen Sie zum \texttt{View} (oder
+\texttt{File}$\rhd$\texttt{Export}) Menü und wählen Sie Ihren Output
+(PostScript or PDF).
+
+\subsection{Erweiterung des Layouts}
+
+Wenn Sie einen individuell gefertigten Stil (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:writestyle}),
+welcher individuelle Schablonen definiert, kreiert haben, müssen Sie die Layout-Datei\footnote{Die LPPL
+schreibt vor, eine Datei umzubennen, wenn Sie diese modifizieren, um
+Verwechselungen zu vermeiden.} erweitern, sodass diese Schablonen ebenfalls von
+\LyX unterstützt werden. Die Erklärung unten unterstellt, dass Sie eine
+Schablone (genannt \texttt{sunnyslide}) definiert haben.
+
+Um diese neue Schablone in \LyX zu unterstützen, müssen Sie den folgenden Befehl benutzen.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small,fillcolor=\color{yellow}]
+ \{pddefinelyxtemplate}<cs>{<template>}
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+\marginpar{\texttt{$\backslash$pddefinelyxtemplate}}
+
+Dies wird die Befehlssequenz <\textsl{cs}> derart definieren, dass Sie eine Folie mit der Schablone
+<\textsl{template}> kreieren (die mit der Benutzung von
+\slash{pddefinetemplate} definiert wurde). Diese neue Befehlssequenz kann wie folgt in der Layout-Datei
+gebraucht werden.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ # SunnySlide environment definition
+ Style SunnySlide
+ CopyStyle Slide
+ LatexName lyxend\lyxsunnyslide
+ Font
+ Color Yellow
+ EndFont
+ Preamble
+ \pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxsunnyslide{sunnyslide}
+ EndPreamble
+ End
+\end{Verbatim}
+Beachten Sie, dass das \texttt{LatexName} Feld mit \texttt{lyxend} beginnen muss. Die Definition
+der \LyX\ Schablone wurde zwischen
+\texttt{Preamble} und \texttt{EndPreamble} eingefügt, was gewährleistet, dass die neue \LyX\
+Umgebung in jeder Präsentation funktionieren wird. Nachdem die Layout-Datei
+identifiziert wurde,
+vergessen Sie nicht \LyX wieder zu starten. Für mehr Informationen über das Erstellen einer \LyX\
+Umgebung schauen Sie in die Dokumentation für \LyX\ im \texttt{Hilfemenü}.
+
+\section{Fragen }\label{sec:questions}
+\subsection{Häufig gestellte Fragen}\label{sec:FAQ}
+
+Dieser Abschnitt ist häufig gestellten Fragen gewidmet. Lesen Sie aufmerksam, Ihre Probleme könnten in
+diesem Abschnitt gelöst werden.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{Frage 1}]
+Hat \pf{powerdot} Beispieldateien? Wo kann ich diese finden?
+\item[\textbf{Antwort 1}]
+\pf{powerdot} hat einige Beispiele, die sich in ihrem Pfad bei der \LaTeX\ Installation befinden. Genauer:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. Wenn Sie diese hier nicht finden können, laden Sie sie von CTAN herunter
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}
+\cite{CTAN}.
+\item[\textbf{F 2}]
+Ich bekomme Fehler oder unerwartete Outputs, wenn die simpelste Programmübersetzung läuft.
+\item[\textbf{A 2}]
+ Haben Sie Abschnitt~\ref{sec:compiling} gelesen?
+\item[\textbf{F 3}]
+Ich habe einen Tippfehler in dem Foliencode gemacht, ließ die Datei durchlaufen, berichtigte den
+Tippfehler und ließ die Datei erneut durchlaufen. Aber nun bekam ich einen Fehler, der sich nicht
+entfernen ließ.
+\item[\textbf{A 3}]
+Entfernen Sie die \texttt{.bm} und \texttt{.toc} Dateien und versuchen Sie es erneut.
+\item[\textbf{F 4}]
+\slash{pause} funktioniert nicht in der \texttt{align} Umgebung\footnote{Es gibt einige andere Umgebungen,
+die ähnlich funktionieren. Ein Beispiel ist die \texttt{split} Umgebung, aber dies (oft in dem
+\pf{amsmath} Packet) kann die gleichen Probleme mit \slash{pause}
+verursachen.}.
+\item[\textbf{A 4}]
+\texttt{align} macht einige komplizierte Dinge, die es unmöglichen machen
+\slash{pause} zu benutzen.
+Benutzen Sie stattdessen \slash{onslide}. Siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:onslide}.
+\item[\textbf{F 5}]
+Meine \pf{pstricks} nodes treten auf allen Overlays auf. Außerdem scheint
+\texttt{color} nicht mit \slash{onslide} zu funktionieren.
+\item[\textbf{A 5}]
+Einige PostScript Tricks , wie nodes und color funktionieren nicht mit
+\slash{onslide}. Benutzen Sie stattdessen \slash{onslide*}. Siehe das
+folgende Beispiel.
+
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{pst-node}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Color}
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{A}}
+ This is {\onslide*{2-}{\color{red}} red} text.
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{B}}
+ \onslide{2}{\ncline{A}{B}}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\item[\textbf{F 6}]
+Muss ich Stil-Dateien editieren, um diese ein bisschen zu verändern?
+\item[\textbf{A 6}]
+Nein, Sie müssen keine Stil-Dateien editieren. Sie können jeden Teil eines bestimmten Stils verändern,
+indem Sie die Befehle \slash{pddefinetemplate} und
+\slash{pddefinepalettes} anwenden. Hier ist ein Beispiel, das die rechte Fußnote aus dem \pf{default}
+Stil entfernt, die linke Fußnote in das Zentrum verschiebt und eine andere Farbskala hinzufügt.
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{
+ lfhook=Bc,lfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
+ rfpos
+ }{}
+ \pddefinepalettes{mypalette}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.27,.31,.44}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.85,.85,.92}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.8,.75,.98}
+ }
+ \pdsetup{
+ lf=My presentation,
+ palette=mypalette
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Title}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{Verbatim}
+Siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:writestyle} für mehr Informationen über diese beiden Befehle.
+\item[\textbf{F 7}]
+Kann ich bei diesem Projekt mitarbeiten?
+\item[\textbf{A 7}]
+Sicher. Wenn Sie Fehler\footnote{Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie bestätigen können, dass
+der Fehler wirklich von \pf{powerdot} verursacht wird und nicht von einem anderen Paket,
+dass Sie benutzen.} oder Tippfehler finden, senden Sie uns eine Nachricht zu der Verteilerliste
+(siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:mailinglist}). Wenn Sie einen eigenen Stil erstellt haben, der sich von den
+existierenden Stilen unterscheidet und Sie diesen in \pf{powerdot}aufgenommen sehen wollen, informieren
+Sie uns bitte durch eine private E-Mail und wir werden Ihren Beitrag prüfen. Beachten Sie, dass
+aufgenommene Beiträge unter das allgemeine \pf{powerdot} Lizenz und Urheberrecht fallen. Aber Ihr Name
+wird in die Dokumentation aufgenommen, wenn Sie einen Beitrag leisten. Dies
+wird getan, um zu garantieren,
+dass wir Dateien adaptieren falls Wartungsarbeiten nötig sind.
+\end{description}
+
+Wenn Ihre Fragen an diesem Punkt nicht beantwortet wurden, stoßen Sie zu dem nächsten Abschnitt vor, um
+zu Lesen, wo Sie mehr Antworten finden.
+
+\subsection{Mailing-Liste}\label{sec:mailinglist}
+
+\pf{powerdot} hat eine Mailing-Liste von \url{freelists.org} und hat die Website hier:
+\begin{center}
+\url{http://www.freelists.org/list/powerdot}
+\end{center}
+Da gibt es einen Link zu `List Archive'. Bitte durchsuchen Sie das Archiv, bevor Sie ihre Frage stellen.
+Ihr Problem wurde vielleicht schon in der Vergangenheit gelöst.
+
+Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, benutzen Sie die Box auf der Seite, um Ihre
+E-Mail-Adresse zu schreiben; wählen Sie die Aktion `Subscribe' und klicken Sie auf `Go!'. Folgen Sie dann
+den Anweisungen, die Sie per E-Mail erreicht haben. An diesem bestimmten Zeitpunkt können Sie sich zum
+ersten Mal mit einem autorisierten Code, der Ihnen per E-Mail zugesandt wurde, einloggen. Nachdem Sie
+sich eingeloggt haben, können Sie sich ein eigenes Passwort für zukünftige Arbeitssitzungen unter dem
+Button `Hauptmenü' erstellen. Die anderen Buttons versorgen Sie mit einigen Informationen und Optionen
+für Ihren Account.
+
+Wenn Sie alles eingestellt haben, können Sie der Liste schreiben, indem
+Sie eine E-Mail an
+\begin{center}
+\url{powerdot [at] freelists [dot] org}
+\end{center}
+senden.
+
+Wenn Sie der Liste schreiben, behalten Sie die folgenden Kernpunkte im Hinterkopf.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Wir sind Freiwillige!
+\item Beziehen Sie Ihre Fragen auf \pf{powerdot}.
+\item Liefern Sie ein \emph{minimales} Beispiel, was Ihr Problem deutlich macht.
+\item Senden Sie an die Liste keine großen Dateien.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Wir hoffen, dass Sie Gefallen an diesem Service finden.
+
+\section{Quelltextdokumentation}\label{sec:source}
+
+Für den Fall, dass Sie die Paketdateien von der Quelle aus erneuen möchten oder Sie einen Blick auf die
+Quelltextbeschreibung werfen möchten, finden Sie
+\texttt{powerdot.dtx}, suchen Sie in der Datei nach \slash{OnlyDescription}, entfernen Sie dies und
+führen sie aus:
+\begin{Verbatim}[frame=single,fontsize=\small]
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ bibtex powerdot
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+\end{Verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Literatur}
+\begin{thebibliography}{999}
+\bibitem{HA-prosper} \textsc{Hendri Adriaens.}
+ \texttt{HA-prosper} package.\\ \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/HA-prosper}.
+\bibitem{xkeyval} \textsc{Hendri Adriaens.} \texttt{xkeyval} package.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xkeyval}.
+\bibitem{random} \textsc{Donald Arseneau.} \texttt{random.tex}.
+\url{CTAN:/macros/generic/misc}.
+\bibitem{enumitem} \textsc{Javier Bezos.} \texttt{enumitem} package.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem}.
+\bibitem{graphics} \textsc{David Carlisle.} \texttt{graphics bundle}.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/required/graphics}.
+\bibitem{LyXWeb} \LyX{} \textsc{crew.} \LyX{} website. \url{http://www.lyx.org}.
+\bibitem{CTAN} \textsc{CTAN crew.} The Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive Network.\\
+\url{http://www.ctan.org}.
+\bibitem{natbib} \textsc{Patrick W. Daly.} \texttt{natbib} package.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/natbib}.
+\bibitem{prosper} \textsc{Fr\'{e}d\'{e}ric Goualard and Peter M\o ller
+Neergaard.}\\ \texttt{prosper class}.
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/prosper}.
+\bibitem{xcolor} \textsc{Uwe Kern.} \texttt{xcolor} package.
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xcolor}.
+\bibitem{extsizes} \textsc{James Kilfiger and Wolfgang May.}
+\texttt{extsizes bundle}.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/ contrib/extsizes}.
+\bibitem{companion} \textsc{Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens.} The
+\LaTeX{} Companion. Tools and
+Techniques for Computer Typesetting. Addison-Wesley, Boston, Massachusetts, 2 edition, 2004.
+With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley.
+\bibitem{hyperref} \textsc{Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Overdiek.}
+\texttt{hyperref} package.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref}.
+\bibitem{geometry} \textsc{Hideo Umeki.} \texttt{geometry} package.\\
+\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/geometry}.
+\bibitem{PSTricksWeb} \textsc{Herbert Vo}{\ss}. \texttt{PSTricks website}.
+\url{http://pstricks.tug.org}.
+\bibitem{PSTricks} \textsc{Timothy Van Zandt et al.} \texttt{PSTricks} package, v1.07,
+2005/05/06. \url{CTAN: /graphics/pstricks}.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\section*{Danksagung}
+Die Autoren danken Mael Hill\'ereau für das Beisteuern der \LyX -Layoutdatei und deren
+Beschreibung. Ferner all jenen, die Stile für \pf{Powerdot} bereitstellten
+(Abschnitt~\ref{sec:styles}) und darüberhinaus allen, die an diesem Paket
+in der einen oder
+anderen Weise beteiligt waren.\\[1em]
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
+Ramon van den Akker, Pavel \v C\'i\v zek, Darren Dale, Hans Marius
+Eikseth, Morten H\o gholm, Andr\'as Horv\'ath, Laurent Jacques, Akira
+Kakuto, Uwe Kern, Kyanh, Theo Stewart, Don P. Story and Herbert Vo\ss.
+\end{minipage}
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}\\[1em]
+Wir hoffen, dass wir niemanden vergessen haben.
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6be633fea8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e095b47c20e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/powerdot/docs/powerdotSlide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2635 @@
+%%
+%% This documentation is prepared by Herbert Voss
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+\documentclass{powerdot}
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{fourier}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{listings}
+\usepackage{array}
+\def\Lcs#1{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+\lstnewenvironment{command}{%
+ \lstset{columns=flexible,frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{blue!20},%
+ xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep,escapeinside=`',gobble=1}}{}
+\lstdefinestyle{example}{%
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,columns=flexible,frame=single,%
+ backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},xleftmargin=\fboxsep,%
+ xrightmargin=\fboxsep,%
+ language=[LaTeX]TeX,keywordstyle=\color{blue},%
+ moretexcs=[1]{color,ProvidesPackage},%
+ moretexcs=[2]{onslide,pause,pdsetup,maketitle,tableofcontents},%
+ texcsstyle=[2]\color{red}}
+\makeatletter
+\def\option#1{%
+ \XKV@for@n{#1}\pd@tempa{%
+ \fcolorbox{black}{red!20}{\texttt\pd@tempa}\quad
+ }%
+ \vspace*{.2cm}%
+}
+\def\larg#1{{\ttfamily\char`\<}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\>}}
+\def\LyX{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@}
+\def\LyXarrow{\leavevmode\,$\triangleright$\,\allowbreak}
+\let\pf\textsf
+\def\equals{=}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\newcolumntype{d}{c|l}
+\newcolumntype{e}{c|c|c|c}
+\newcolumntype{f}{l|p{8cm}}
+\newcounter{FAQ}
+\def\question{%
+ \stepcounter{FAQ}%
+ \parskip4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \itemsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \parsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \item[\textbf{Q\arabic{FAQ}}]%
+}
+\def\answer{%
+ \parskip0pt
+ \itemsep0pt
+ \parsep0pt
+ \item[\textbf{A\arabic{FAQ}}]%
+}
+\def\styleexample#1{%
+ \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}{%
+ \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}{%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{1}}%
+ \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
+ {powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}}%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{2}}%
+ \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
+ {powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}}%
+ \hspace*{\stretch{1}}\par
+ }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
+ }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\def\fileversion{v1.4e}
+\def\filedate{2010/12/18}
+
+\title{The \pf{powerdot} class}
+\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison\and Herbert Vo\ss}
+\date{\fileversion\ (\filedate)}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{slide}{Abstract}
+\begin{abstract}
+\pf{powerdot} is a presentation class for \LaTeX\ that allows for
+the quick and easy development of professional presentations. It
+comes with many tools that enhance presentations and aid the
+presenter. Examples are automatic overlays, personal notes and a
+handout mode. To view a presentation, DVI, PS or PDF output can be
+used. A powerful template system is available to easily develop new
+styles. A \LyX\ layout file is provided.
+\end{abstract}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{Contents}
+\tableofcontents
+\end{slide}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\begin{slide}{Introduction}\label{sec:intro}
+This class builds on and extends the \pf{prosper} class
+\cite{prosper} and the \pf{HA-prosper} package \cite{HA-prosper}.
+The \pf{HA-prosper} package was initially intended to extend
+\pf{prosper} and correct some bugs and problems of that class. As
+developments on that package progressed, it was found that
+unfortunately, not all of the problems could be overcome with the
+package. That discovery was the start of a new project set up to
+make a new class to replace the \pf{prosper} plus \pf{HA-prosper}
+combination. You're currently reading the result of that project.\pause
+
+The remainder of this section will be devoted to giving a feel of
+what the \pf{powerdot} presentation source looks like and giving an
+overview of this documentation.\pause
+
+The document structure of a presentation is always the same. You can
+find it in the example below.
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}[method=direct]{Example}
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=example]
+\documentclass[<class options>]{powerdot}
+\pdsetup{<presentation options>}
+\begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{a slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{first section}
+ \begin{slide}[<slide options>]{another slide}
+ Contents of the slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{personal note}
+ The note.
+ \end{note}
+\end{document}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}[method=direct]{}
+There are several elements that define the document structure. First
+of all, the class accepts some class options that control the output
+of the class, for instance, paper type and style. These class
+options will be discussed in section~\ref{sec:classopts}. Then there
+are presentation specific options which control some of the elements
+of the presentation globally, for instance, the footers. These will
+be discussed in section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}.
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}[method=direct]{}
+Once the setup has been decided on, you can use the slide
+environment to produce slides (see section~\ref{sec:slides}) and the
+note environment to produce notes that go with the slides (see
+section~\ref{sec:notes}). You can use overlays to display material
+in steps. This is described in section~\ref{sec:overlays}. The
+\verb=\section= command provides a way to structure your presentation.
+This is discussed in section~\ref{sec:structure}.
+Section~\ref{sec:styles} will show an overview of the styles that
+come with this class and the characteristics of each style.
+Section~\ref{sec:compiling} will tell you more about how to produce
+output. This section contains important information on required
+packages.
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}[method=direct]{}
+Section~\ref{sec:writestyle} is mostly interesting for people that
+want to develop their own style for this class or want to modify an
+existing style. Section~\ref{sec:lyx} explains how \LyX\
+\cite{LyXWeb} can be used to create \pf{powerdot} presentations.
+This documentation concludes with a section devoted to questions
+(section~\ref{sec:questions}), like `Where can I find examples?'. It
+also tells you where to turn to in case your questions are still not
+solved.
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\section{Setting up the presentation}\label{sec:setup}
+\subsection{Document class options}\label{sec:classopts}
+\begin{slide}{Document class options}
+This section will describe all options that are available to control
+the output of the presentation and the looks of it. \pause
+
+We will
+start with the class options that are typed in the \Lcs{documentclass}
+command as a comma-separated list. For each option, the preset
+value will be mentioned in the description. This is the value
+that will be used if you decide to not give a value to the option or
+not use the option at all. The value that will be used when you don't use the
+option.
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{}
+This options controls the kind of output that we want to produce.
+The preset value is \texttt{present}.\pause
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{mode=present}
+This mode is used when you want to create the actual presentation. It
+will enable overlays and transition effects. You can read more about
+overlays in section~\ref{sec:overlays}.
+\item\option{mode=print}\\
+This mode can be used when printing the slides including their visual
+markup, but without any overlay or transition effects.
+\item\option{mode=handout}\\
+This mode will produce a black and white overview of your slides that
+can be used to make personal notes on, for distribution to students,
+a personal guide during your talk, etcetera.
+\end{description}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}{}
+This options controls the kind of output that we want to produce.
+The preset value is \texttt{present}.\pause
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{nopagebreaks}\\
+By default, the handout mode produces a document with two slides per
+page. If you want to fit more slides on a page, specify this option
+in the \Lcs{documentclass} command and \pf{powerdot} will let \LaTeX\
+decide on the places to insert a page break, namely when a page is
+full.
+\end{description}
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}{}
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{paper} This option has three possible values. The
+preset value is \texttt{screen}.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{paper=screen}\\
+This is a special format with screen optimized ratio (4/3). The
+actual page dimensions will be 8.25 inch by 11 inch. This paper format
+is not available for print or handout mode. In these modes, \pf{powerdot}
+will switch to a4 paper and put a warning that it did this in the
+log file of your presentation.
+\item\option{paper=a4paper}\\
+A4 paper will be used for the presentation or handout.
+\item\option{paper=letterpaper}\\
+Letter size paper will be used.
+\end{description}
+\end{description}
+\end{slide}
+
+\end{document}
+
+Some important information with respect to paper size, compiling and
+viewing presentations is available in section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
+
+\DescribeOption{orient} This controls the orientation of the
+presentation. The preset value is |landscape|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{orient=landscape}\\
+The presentation will be in landscape format. This value is not
+available in handout mode. In that mode, \pf{powerdot} will switch
+to portrait orientation and will warn you about this in the log
+file.
+\item\option{orient=portrait}\\ This produces slides in portrait
+format. Notice that not all styles support portrait orientation. Please
+refer to section~\ref{sec:styles} for information about which styles
+do support the portrait orientation.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{display} This controls the production of slides and
+notes. The preset value is |slides|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{display=slides}\\
+This will only typeset the slides in your presentation.
+\item\option{display=slidesnotes}\\
+This will typeset both the slides and the notes in your
+presentation. See also section~\ref{sec:notes} for more information
+about notes.
+\item\option{display=notes}\\
+This will typeset the notes only.
+\end{description}
+
+Here are some more options to control the output.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{size}\option{size}\\
+This is the size of the normal text font in points. Possible values
+are 8pt, 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt, 17pt and 20pt and the preset
+value is 11pt.\footnote{Note that sizes other than 10pt, 11pt and
+12pt are non-standard and it is assumed that you have the
+\pf{extsizes} bundle \cite{extsizes} installed, which provides these
+sizes.}
+\item\DescribeOption{style}\option{style}\\
+This controls the style to be loaded for the presentation. By
+default, the \pf{default} style will be loaded. For more styles, see
+section~\ref{sec:styles}.
+\item\DescribeOption{fleqn}\option{fleqn}\\
+This option makes equations flushed left. It does the same as the
+equally named option for the article class.
+\item\DescribeOption{leqno}\option{leqno}\\
+Put equation numbers at the left. Also the same as in the article
+class.
+\item\DescribeOption{nopsheader}\option{nopsheader}\\
+By default, \pf{powerdot} will write a postscript command to the ps
+file to make sure that post processors like ps2pdf know which paper
+to use without the need to specify it on the command line. See also
+section~\ref{sec:compiling}. If you experience problems with post
+processing or printing or you want to specify the paper size in the
+post processing steps yourself, use this option.
+\item\DescribeOption{hlentries}\option{hlentries}\\
+This highlights table of contents entries when the entry matches
+with the current slide and its preset value is |true|. See also
+section~\ref{sec:structure}. If you don't want highlighting of table
+of contents entries (for instance in print mode), use
+|hlentries=false|.
+\item\DescribeOption{hlsections}\option{hlsections}\\
+This highlights table of contents sections when the section matches
+with the current section in the presentation and is preset to |false|.
+See also section~\ref{sec:structure}. Specifying this
+option turns highlighting of sections on. This could be useful when
+you are using a style that implements a split table of contents.
+\item\DescribeOption{blackslide}\option{blackslide}\\
+This option inserts a black slide in the presentation on page 1 and
+will automatically advance to page 2 when opening the presentation
+in a PDF viewer like Acrobat (Reader). The option also inserts a
+link behind every slide or section title that brings you to the
+black slide when clicked. When you click anywhere in the black
+slide, you will go back to the originating slide. This option can be
+used to temporarily pause a presentation, for instance, to do a
+proof on the black board.
+\item\DescribeOptions{clock}\option{clock}\\
+This displays a small digital clock on slides which you can use to
+check the time left for your presentation.
+\end{description}
+
+Here is an example of a \Lcs{documentclass} command.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=screen,
+ mode=present,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nopagebreaks,
+ blackslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{example}
+This example sets up a presentation in \pf{tycja} style, with a black
+slide, normal size 12 points and flushed left equations.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[
+ size=12pt,
+ paper=letterpaper,
+ mode=handout,
+ display=slidesnotes,
+ style=tycja,
+ nopagebreaks,
+ blackslide,
+ fleqn
+ ]{powerdot}
+\end{example}
+Changing the |paper} and |mode} options, now produces a handout with
+possibly more than two slides per page due to the |nopagebreaks|
+option.
+
+\subsection{Setup options}\label{sec:pdsetup}
+\DescribeMacro{\pdsetup}
+There are several extra options that can help customizing your
+presentation. These options are not available via the
+|\documentclass} command. This has a technical reason.\footnote{The
+interested reader is referred to the section about the \pf{xkvltxp}
+package in the \pf{xkeyval} package documentation \cite{xkeyval}.}
+We distinguish two types of options. Options that can only be set
+globally (acting for the entire presentation) using the \Lcs{pdsetup|
+command and options that can be accessed both globally (via
+|\pdsetup|) and locally (via slide environments, see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+
+\subsubsection{Global options}\label{sec:gopts}
+This section describes options that can only be used globally in the
+preamble of your presentation via the \Lcs{pdsetup} command.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{palette}\option{palette}\\
+This specifies the palette to be used. A palette is a set of colors
+defined by a style. To find out which palettes are defined by each
+style, see section~\ref{sec:styles}.
+\item\DescribeOption{theslide}\option{theslide}\\
+This option controls how the slide number appears on the slide. This
+is preset to the value \Lcs{arabic{slide}~/~\pageref*{lastslide}|,
+which could appear like |5/22|. Notice that the \Lcs{arabic{slide}|
+typesets the number of the current slide and that
+|\pageref*{lastslide}} typesets the number of the last
+slide.\footnote{We use the starred version of \cs{pageref} which is
+defined by \pf{hyperref} and does not create a link to the page that
+it is referring to.}
+\item\DescribeOption{thenote}\option{thenote}\\
+This is similar to the |theslide} option, but typesets the slide
+numbers of notes. The preset value is
+|note~\arabic{note}~of~slide~\arabic{slide}} and \Lcs{arabic{note}|
+here typesets the number of the current note that goes with the
+current slide. This could appear like |note 2 of slide 7|.
+\item\DescribeOption{counters}\option{counters}\\
+The |counters} option lists counters that you might want to protect
+on overlays. As material on overlays (see
+section~\ref{sec:overlays}) is processed multiple times, also
+\LaTeX\ counters, like the |equation} counter, might be increased
+too often. To avoid that your equations get different numbers on
+every overlay, use this option. The |equation|, |table|, |figure|,
+|footnote} and |mpfootnote} counters are already protected for you.
+If you use extra counters, for instance for theorems, list them in
+this option. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ counters={theorem,lemma}
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOption{list}\option{list}\\
+This option takes a list of options that will be passed on to the
+\pf{enumitem} package that controls the layout of lists created by
+the |enumerate} and |itemize} environments. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
+\end{example}
+See for more information on controlling the layout of lists the
+\pf{enumitem} package \cite{enumitem}.
+\item\DescribeOptions{enumerate,itemize}\option{enumerate,itemize}\\
+As the |list} option, but only control |enumerate} and |itemize|
+environments respectively.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsubsection{Global and local options}\label{sec:glopts}
+This section describes options that can be used both globally via
+|\pdsetup} and locally via slide environments (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOptions{lf,cf,rf}\option{lf,cf,rf}\\
+This determines the content of the left, center and right footers.
+These are preset to empty.
+\item\DescribeOption{trans}\option{trans}\\
+This option sets the default transition effect to be used in the
+presentation. These transition effects only work after compiling the
+presentation to PDF format. See also section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
+The following transition effects are supported: |Split|, |Blinds|,
+|Box|, |Wipe|, |Dissolve|, |Glitter} and |Replace|. When you are using
+a viewer that understands PDF 1.5, you can also use |Fly|, |Push|,
+|Cover|, |Uncover} or |Fade|. It is important to notice that most
+viewers are case sensitive, so, for instance, |box} will not work.
+
+The preset effect is |Replace} which just replaces one slide with
+another when browsing the slides. Note that some PDF viewers (like
+Acrobat Reader 5 and higher) only produce the transition effect in
+full screen mode. If you want to use a custom transition effect that
+is not listed in the list above (for instance, a wipe effect with a
+custom wipe direction), then that is possible. However,
+\pf{powerdot} will put a warning in your log file that the effect
+that you have chosen, might not work in the PDF viewer. Here is an
+example that does work.
+\begin{example}
+ trans=Wipe /Di 0
+\end{example}
+In Acrobat (Reader), this wipes from left to right instead of the
+default top to bottom. For more information, see a PDF Reference
+Manual.
+\item\DescribeOption{method}\option{method}\\
+This option can be used when a slide contains special material that
+does not get treated in the `usual' way by \LaTeX. Verbatim material
+is an example of this. Possible values are |normal} (the preset value),
+|direct} and |file|. We will come back to this option in detail in
+section~\ref{sec:verbatim}.
+\item\DescribeOptions{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\option{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\\
+If |logopos} is specified, a logo defined by the value of the
+|logocmd} option will be put on slides. The position can be
+specified relative to the width and height of the slide. |{0,0}} is
+the lower left corner of the paper and |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|
+is the upper right corner. For positioning the logo, the \Lcs{rput|
+command of \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} is used. This
+command also allows to specify the point of the logo that should be
+positioned there. This point can be entered via the |logohook|
+option and can take the values |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
+|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B} and |c|. For more information about
+|\rput|, consult the \pf{pstricks} documentation. Here is an example
+that integrates the flower of the \pf{default} style into the
+\pf{husky} style.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass[style=husky]{powerdot}
+ \pdsetup{
+ logohook=t,
+ logopos={.088\slidewidth,.99\slideheight},
+ logocmd={\includegraphics[height=.08\slideheight]{powerdot-default.ps}}
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The preset value for |logohook} is |tl|.
+\end{description}
+
+A special feature of \pf{powerdot}, which can be used to make
+presentations come alive, is the use of random dots. These dots will
+be placed anywhere on your slides and use the colors defined by the
+palette that you use. Overlays will carry the same dots. This
+feature uses |random.tex} \cite{random}. Several options are
+available to control the appearance of the random dots.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{randomdots}\option{randomdots}\\
+By default, random dots are turned off. If this option is set to
+|true|, random dots will be generated. |false} will turn off the
+feature. When no value is submitted to the option, |true} will be
+used.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dmindots,dmaxdots}\option{dmindots,dmaxdots}\\
+The number of dots per slide is also random. These options set the
+minimum and maximum dots per slide. Preset values are |5} and |40|,
+respectively.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dminsize,dmaxsize}\option{dminsize,dmaxsize}\\
+The minimum and maximum radius of the dots. Preset values are |5pt|
+and |40pt|, respectively.
+\item\DescribeOptions{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}
+\option{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}\\
+These options determine the area on the slide that can be used for
+the random dots. These values are preset such that dots go anywhere
+on the slide, but you might want to adjust these such that, for
+instance, dots can only appear in the text area. The preset values
+are |0pt|, \Lcs{slidewidth|, |0pt|, \Lcs{slideheight|.
+
+Here is an example that allows dots in a smaller rectangle on the
+slide.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ dminwidth=.1\slidewidth,dmaxwidth=.9\slidewidth,
+ dminheight=.2\slideheight,dmaxheight=.8\slideheight
+ }
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOption{dbright}\option{dbright}\\
+This option can be used to adjust the brightness of the dots. The
+number should be an integer between -100 and 100. If the number is
+negative, the color will be adjusted towards black, with -100 giving
+black. If the number is positive, the color will be adjusted towards
+white, with 100 giving white. With a light background, you may want
+to choose |bright} to be positive. With a dark background, you may
+want to set it negative. The preset value is |60|, meaning a mixture
+of 40\ of the original color and 60\ white.
+\item\DescribeOption{dprop}\option{dprop}\\
+This option is used for passing extra parameters to the \Lcs{psdot|
+command, which creates the random dots. You could, for instance,
+change the style of the dots or the line width. See for more
+information about \Lcs{psdot} the \pf{pstricks} documentation
+\cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}. \pf{powerdot} defines two extra dot
+styles that can be used for the random dots. These styles are
+|ocircle} (open circle) and |osquare} (open square).
+\end{description}
+
+Here are two examples for the use of random dots.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dminwidth=.2\slidewidth
+ }
+\end{example}
+This turns on random dots and doesn't use the left 20\ of the slide
+for placing random dots.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.5pt},
+ dminsize=500pt,dmaxsize=600pt,dmindots=2,dmaxdots=5
+ }
+\end{example}
+This example puts at most 5 big circles on slides. These circles do
+not fit on the slides and you will only see parts of them in the
+shape of curves.
+
+\subsubsection{\cs{pdsetup} example}
+Here is an example of a \Lcs{pdsetup} command that one could use to set up
+the presentation.
+\begin{example}
+ \pdsetup{
+ lf=My first presentation,
+ rf=For some conference,
+ trans=Wipe,
+ theslide=\arabic{slide},
+ randomdots,dmaxdots=80
+ }
+\end{example}
+This sets the left and right footers and will initialize the
+transition effect to |Wipe|. Further, slide numbers will not include
+the number of the last slide, but only the number of the current
+slide. Finally, slides will be covered with at most 80 random dots.
+
+A small note is necessary with respect to the appearance of footers.
+The slide number (controlled by the |theslide} option) will be added
+to a footer. Most styles add it too the right footer. If both the
+footer and the slide number are non empty, |~--~} will be inserted
+in between them to separate them. Styles might modify this default
+behavior however.
+
+\section{Making slides}\label{sec:slides}
+\subsection{The title slide}\label{sec:titleslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\title}
+\DescribeMacro{\author}
+\DescribeMacro{\and}
+\DescribeMacro{\date}
+\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}
+The title slide is created by the \Lcs{maketitle} command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{maketitle}\oarg{options}'
+\end{command}
+Its use is the same as in the standard \LaTeX\ document classes. The
+optional argument \meta{options} can contain any option from
+section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Specifying such an option in the
+|\maketitle} command will only have an effect on the title slide and
+not on other slides. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \title{Title}
+ \author{You \and me}
+ \date{October 7, 2010}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The |author|, |title} and |date} declarations provide the text to be
+used when making a title page. The design of the title page is
+specific to the style in use. Notice the use of \Lcs{and} for
+separating multiple authors. See a \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion}
+for more information on commands such as \Lcs{title} and \Lcs{author|.
+
+\subsection{Other slides}\label{sec:otherslides}
+\DescribeEnv{slide} The centerpiece of every presentation is the
+slide. In \pf{powerdot}, the content of each slide is placed in a
+|slide} environment.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{begin}\texttt{\{slide\}}\oarg{options}\marg{slide title}'
+ `\meta{body}'
+ `\cs{end}\texttt{\{slide\}}'
+\end{command}
+
+In section~\ref{sec:overlays} we'll see how to give some life to the
+slides, but for now, let's look at a simple example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{First slide}
+ Hello World.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The slide environment has one required argument, namely the slide
+title. When a slide is created, the slide title is used to create an
+entry in the table of contents and in the list of bookmarks. The
+table of contents is a listing of the slides and section titles in
+the presentation that appears on each slide.
+
+The table of contents is clickable (when the presentation is
+compiled into PDF) and serves as a nice way to jump from location to
+location within the presentation. The bookmark list is only present
+when compilation is taken all the way to the PDF file format. It
+also serves as a table of contents, but this list does not appear on
+\textit{any} of the slides, but in a separate window in a PDF
+viewer. In the example above, the entries in both table contents and
+the list of bookmarks would be titled |First slide|.
+
+The \meta{options} for the |slide} environment can contain any
+option listed in section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Additionally, the
+following options can be used.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{toc}\option{toc}\\
+When specified, the value is used for the entry in the table of
+contents; otherwise, the slide title is used. If |toc=} is
+specified, then no entry is created.
+\item\DescribeOption{bm}\option{bm}\\
+When specified, the value is used for the bookmark entry; otherwise,
+the slide title is used. If |bm=} is specified, then no entry is
+created.
+\end{description}
+
+These optional arguments are especially useful when the title of a
+slide is extremely long or when the title contains \LaTeX\ commands
+that do not render correctly in the bookmarks.\footnote{The
+bookmarking procedure uses \cs{pdfstringdef} from the \pf{hyperref}
+package, and it can process accented characters such as \cs{"i}.}
+When specifying entries, be sure to hide special characters `|,|'
+and `|=|' between curly brackets `|{|' and `|}|'. Let's look at an
+example that uses these optional arguments.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm={LaTeX, i*i=-1}]{\color{red}\LaTeX, $i^2=-1$}
+ My slide contents.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+
+In this example, the slide title will appear as {\color{red}\LaTeX,
+$i^2=-1$}. This text will not render correctly in a bookmark entry.
+An attempt is made to correct this, but often, the correction does
+not produce an equivalent text. This particular title would be
+rendered in the bookmark list as |redLaTeX, i2=-1|. On the other
+hand, the manually specified bookmark entry is rendered as:
+|LaTeX, i*i=-1|. Notice, no entry is created in the table of contents,
+because of the use of |toc=|.
+
+In addition to the |slide} environment, each individual style can
+define its own environments. Many styles have a |wideslide|
+environment. The idea is that one might have information that does
+not fit nicely on a slide with a table of contents listed, as this
+consumes some space. In such cases, it is preferable to use a slide
+that does not list the table of contents. The |wideslide|
+environment provides this functionality and has more space for the
+actual slide content. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for information
+on the various environments provided by the styles.
+
+\section{Overlays}\label{sec:overlays}
+It is often the case that you don't want all the information on the
+slide to appear at once. Rather, the information should appear one
+item at a time. In \pf{powerdot}, this is achieved with overlays.
+Each slide can be comprised of many overlays, and the overlays are
+displayed one at a time.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{pause} command}\label{sec:pause}
+\DescribeMacro{\pause} The easiest way to display information
+sequentially is to use the \Lcs{pause} command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pause}\oarg{number}'
+\end{command}
+Below is a simple example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple overlay}
+ power\pause dot
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The slide's information is displayed and continues until the
+|\pause} command is encountered. No further output within the same
+slide is displayed until the click of the mouse or the touch of the
+keyboard. Then, the content will continue to display until all the
+information is displayed or until another \Lcs{pause} command is
+encountered. In this example, |power} is displayed on the first
+overlay, and |powerdot} is the displayed on the second overlay. The
+|\pause} command is often used within the |itemize} and |enumerate|
+environments. For example,
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Multiple pauses}
+ power\pause dot \pause
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Let me pause\ldots \pause
+ \item \ldots while I talk \pause and chew bubble gum. \pause
+ \item Perhaps you'll be persuaded.
+ \item Perhaps not.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Since \Lcs{pause} was used before the |itemize} environment, no item
+will appear until the third overlay. Then, each item will be
+displayed one at a time, each on their own overlay. More information
+on using lists will follow in the next section.
+
+The optional argument of the \Lcs{pause} command specifies the number
+of overlays to pause. An example usage is:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Pause longer}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause[2]
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+In the example above, item |C} will appear on the fourth overlay.
+The usefulness of this option will become more apparent in the next
+section; so we will revisit a similar example at that time.
+
+\subsection{List environments}\label{sec:lists}
+The list environments, |itemize} and |enumerate|, have special
+treatments in \pf{powerdot}. They have an optional argument that
+will be taken care off by the \pf{enumitem} package (see
+\cite{enumitem}). \pf{powerdot} supplies an extra key for this
+optional argument. In the examples that follow, features will be
+described using the |itemize} environment but they also apply to the
+|enumerate} environment.
+
+Here is the typical usage of the |itemize} environment:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Basic itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The display is simple, each item appears one at a time with each
+overlay.
+
+\DescribeOption{type}
+Suppose we wanted every item to show, but we only wanted one item to
+appear `active' at once. This can be accomplished via the |type|
+option for the |itemize} environment. The preset value is |0|.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \pause
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Now, every item will be displayed in the \emph{inactive
+color}\index{inactive color|usage} (which is defined by the style
+that you use), and the item's font color will become the active one
+on the overlay that it would normally appear on. The default
+behavior is given by |type=0|.
+
+Lists can also be nested to create complicated structures. When a
+list is nested, it inherits the setting of the |type} option from
+the `parent' list, but that can be overruled by specifying the
+|type} option in the optional argument of the nested list. We
+present here one example, but many more can be created by nesting
+lists of different types in different ways.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Nested lists}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A\pause
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item B\pause
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+This displays |A} and |B} on the first overlay, but |B} is inactive.
+On overlay 2, |B} will become active and on overlay 3, |C} will
+become visible.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{item} command}
+\DescribeMacro{\item}
+The \Lcs{item} command has an extra \emph{optional} argument in
+\pf{powerdot} which allows for creating overlays in a more flexible
+way then \Lcs{pause} provides.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{item}\oarg{label}\larg{overlays}'
+\end{command}
+This optional argument should contain an overlay specification
+stating on which overlays you want the item to appear. This
+specification is a comma separated list where each item can used the
+notation as in table \ref{tab:item}.
+\begin{table}[htb]\centering
+\begin{tabular}{d}
+Syntax&Meaning\\\hline
+\texttt{x}&Only overlay \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{-x}&All overlays up to and including \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{x-}&All overlays from \texttt{x}, including \texttt{x}\\
+\texttt{x-y}&All overlays from \texttt{x} to \texttt{y},
+including \texttt{x} and \texttt{y}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\cs{item} and \cs{onslide} notation}\label{tab:item}
+\end{table}
+The \meta{label} argument is the standard optional argument for
+|\item} in \LaTeX. A \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion} can tell you
+more about this argument.
+
+Here is an example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Active itemize}
+ \begin{itemize}[type=1]
+ \item<1> A
+ \item<2> B
+ \item<3> C
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Here we have said that |A} should only be active on overlay 1, |B|
+should only be active on overlay 2, and |C} should only be active on
+overlay 3. Again, when the item is not active, it appears in the
+inactive color because of |type=1|.
+
+If |type=0} is specified and if each item is given an overlay
+option, then each item will appear only when it is active. When the
+item is not active, then it will not show on the slide at all. More
+examples demonstrating the syntax for \meta{overlays} will be
+discussed in the next section.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{onslide} command}\label{sec:onslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide} Overlays can also be achieved using the
+|\onslide} command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{onslide}\marg{overlays}\marg{text}'
+\end{command}
+This command takes an \meta{overlays} specification as first
+argument and the \meta{text} to apply it to as second argument. The
+\meta{overlays} on which the text will appear are specified as a
+comma separated list with syntax as in table \ref{tab:item}. We
+start off with a simple example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide}
+ \onslide{1,2}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+We have instructed |power} to appear on overlays one and two, and
+|dot} to appear only on overlay two. As you might guess, this
+example has the same output as our first \Lcs{pause} example. Yet, it
+is clearly the case that our syntax is more complicated. However,
+this slight ``complication'' also allows for much more flexibility.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide+}Consider the above example with the
+following modifications:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide+}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The \Lcs{onslide+} command displays its content in a different manner
+altogether. Now, |dot} appears on every overlay, but it is in
+inactive color\index{inactive color|usage} and matches the normal
+font color \textit{only} on overlay two. This is comparable to the
+|type=1} behavior for lists (see section~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+When executing this example, we will also notice that the \Lcs{onslide|
+command does hide material, but still reserves the right amount of
+space for it: on overlay 2, the |dot|s appear right above each
+other. The next command does not reserve space.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\onslide*} Instead of hiding and reserving space
+(|\onslide|) or putting \meta{text} in the inactive color
+(|\onslide+|) when the overlay doesn't match \meta{overlays}, this
+command just eats the material altogether. To understand the
+differences, consider the following example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Simple onslide*}
+ \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}\\
+ \texttt{onslide*}: \onslide*{1}{power}\onslide*{2}{dot}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+The output of the first two lines, we are already familiar with. The
+third line displays |power} on overlay 1 and |dot} on overlay 2, but
+no space for |power} is reserved on overlay 2. Hence |dot} will
+start on the cursor position that |power} started on overlay 1 and
+it is not aligned below the other two |dots|.
+
+We finish with an example of the syntax that is possible with
+|\item} and \Lcs{onslide|. Remember that these commands take a comma
+separated list for the \meta{overlays} specification and that each
+element can used the syntax as explained in table \ref{tab:item}.
+The various variations are demonstrated in the example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Lists}
+ \onslide{10}{on overlay 10 only}\par
+ \onslide{-5}{on every overlay before and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{5-}{on every overlay after and including overlay 5}\par
+ \onslide{2-5}{on overlays 2 through 5, inclusive}\par
+ \onslide{-3,5-7,9-}{on every overlay except overlays 4 and 8}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Relative overlays}
+Sometimes it is a pain to keep track of when an item should appear
+or become active. You might, for example, just care that some text
+appears on the overlay \textit{after} some other item. This
+functionality is provided through the use of relative overlays which
+should not be used outside list environments that use \Lcs{item|. Let's
+consider a simple, illuminating example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Relative overlays}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \pause
+ \item B \onslide{+1}{(visible 1 overlay after B)}\pause
+ \item C \onslide{+2-}{(appears 2 overlays after C, visible until the end)}
+ \pause
+ \item D \onslide{+1-6}{(appears 1 overlay after D, visible until overlay 6)}
+ \pause
+ \item E \pause
+ \item F \pause
+ \item G \onslide{+1-+3}{(appears 1 overlay after G for 3 overlays)}\pause
+ \item H \pause
+ \item I \pause
+ \item J \pause
+ \item K
+ \End{itemize}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+As you can see, we still use \Lcs{onslide|. The only change is with the
+syntax of the list of overlays. Now, we can specify a `|+|' symbol
+in the list. In its simplest usage, \Lcs{onslide{+1}} will make text
+display one overlay after the overlay it would \textit{normally}
+appear on. You can still use the syntax in table \ref{tab:item}.
+These are demonstrated in the above example. Notice,
+|\onslide{+1-6}} means that the text will appear one overlay after
+the overlay it would normally appear on and that the text should
+remain shown until overlay seven. To make text appear for a range of
+relative overlays, see the final demonstration in the above example.
+
+\section{Presentation structure}\label{sec:structure}
+\subsection{Making sections}\label{sec:section}
+\DescribeMacro{\section}
+This section describes the \Lcs{section} command which provides a way
+to structure a presentation.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{section}\oarg{options}\marg{section title}'
+\end{command}
+This command will produce a slide with \meta{section title} on it
+and will also use this text to create sections in the table of
+contents and in the bookmarks list. There are several \meta{options}
+to control its output.
+
+\DescribeOption{tocsection} This option controls the creation of a
+section in the table of contents. The preset value is |true|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{tocsection=true}\\
+This does create a section in the table of contents. This means that
+all following slides, until the next section, will be nested under
+this section.
+\item\option{tocsection=false}\\
+This does not create a section in the table of contents and hence
+the section will be listed as an ordinary slide.
+\item\option{tocsection=hidden}\\
+This does create a section in the table of contents, but this is
+only visible when you view a slide that is part of this section.
+This could be used to append a section to the presentation which you
+can discuss if there is some extra time.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{slide} This option controls whether the \Lcs{section|
+command creates a slide. The preset value is |true|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{slide=true}\\
+A slide is created.
+\item\option{slide=false}\\
+No slide will be created. If also |tocsection} is |false|, the
+|\section} command doesn't do anything. If it does create a table of
+contents section (|tocsection=} |true} or |hidden|), its link will
+point to the first slide in the section as the section itself
+doesn't have a slide.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{template} This option can be used to make the
+section slide with another template. By default, a normal |slide|
+environment is used to create the section slide, but if a style
+offers other templates that could be used for this purpose (for
+instance, the |wideslide} environment), then you can use this option
+to select that template. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for an
+overview of the available templates with every style.
+
+Finally, all options available to normal slides are available to
+slides created by \Lcs{section} as well (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
+However, when the section does make a |tocsection|, |toc=} or |bm=|
+won't remove the table of contents entry or the bookmark
+respectively.
+
+\subsection{Making an overview}\label{sec:tableofcontents}
+\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}
+This command creates an overview of your presentation and can only
+be used on a slide.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{tableofcontents}\oarg{options}'
+\end{command}
+There are several \meta{options} to control the output of this
+command.
+
+\DescribeOption{type}
+This option controls whether certain material (depending on the
+input in the |content} option below) will be hidden or displayed in
+the inactive color\index{inactive color|usage}. The preset value is
+|0|. Compare with the |type} option for list environments
+(section~\ref{sec:lists}).
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{type=0}\\
+When material is not of the requested type as specified in the
+|content} option, it will be hidden.
+\item\option{type=1}\\
+As |type=0|, but instead of hiding material, it will be typeset in
+the inactive color.
+\end{description}
+
+\DescribeOption{content}
+The |content} option controls which elements will be included in the
+overview. The preset value is |all|. The description below assumes
+that |type=0} was chosen, but the alternative text for |type=1} can
+easily be deduced.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{content=all}\\
+This will display a full overview of your presentation including all
+sections and slides, except the slides in hidden sections (see
+section~\ref{sec:section}).
+\item\option{content=sections}\\
+This displays only the sections in the presentation.
+\item\option{content=currentsection}\\
+This displays the current section only.
+\item\option{content=future}\\
+This displays all content starting from the current slide.
+\item\option{content=futuresections}\\
+This displays all sections, starting from the current section.
+\end{description}
+
+We finish this section with a small example that will demonstrate
+how you can make a presentation that contains an overall overview of
+sections in the presentation, giving a general idea of the content,
+and per section a detailed overview of the slides in that section.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview}
+ \tableofcontents[content=sections]
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{First section}
+ \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview of the first section}
+ \tableofcontents[content=currentsection,type=1]
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{Some slide}
+ \end{slide}
+ \section{Second section}
+ ...
+\end{example}
+
+\section{Miscellaneous}
+\subsection{Notes}\label{sec:notes}
+\DescribeEnv{note}
+The |note} environment can be used to make personal notes that
+accompany a slide. You can control displaying notes using the
+|display} option (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}). Here is an
+example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Chewing gum}
+ ...
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{Reminder for chewing gum}
+ Don't forget to mention that chewing gum is sticky.
+ \end{note}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Empty slides}\label{sec:emptyslides}
+\DescribeEnv{emptyslide}
+The |emptyslide} environment creates a totally empty slide. The text
+box on the slide can be used for special things like displaying
+photos. This allows for creating a dia show. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{emptyslide}{}
+ \centering
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \includegraphics[height=0.8\slideheight]{me_chewing_gum.eps}
+ \vspace{\stretch{1}}
+ \end{emptyslide}
+\end{example}
+The \Lcs{includegraphics} command is defined by the \pf{graphicx}
+package \cite{graphics}. The \Lcs{stretch} command is used to
+vertically center the picture. Both commands are described in your
+favorite \LaTeX\ manual, for instance \cite{companion}. Note that
+you can use the lengths \Lcs{slideheight} and \Lcs{slidewidth} to scale
+pictures to fit nicely on the slide.
+
+\subsection{Bibliography slide}\label{sec:bib}
+\DescribeEnv{thebibliography}
+\pf{powerdot} redefines the standard \pf{article}
+|thebibliography} environment to suppress the creation of a section
+heading and running headers. All other properties are maintained.
+You can do either of the next two (depending whether you are
+using BiB\TeX\ or not):\\
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References}
+ \begin{thebibliography}{1}
+ \bibitem{someone} Article of someone.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide}
+ \cite{someone}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \bibliography{YourBib}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+\end{minipage}
+
+In case you have a big reference list that you want to spread over
+multiple slides, have a look at the packages \pf{natbib} and
+\pf{bibentry} \cite{natbib}. Using both packages allows you to do:
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{References (1)}
+ \bibliographystyle{plain}
+ \nobibliography{YourBib}
+ \bibentry{someone1}
+ \bibentry{someone2}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}{References (2)}
+ \bibentry{someone3}
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Have a look at your favorite \LaTeX\ manual for more information
+about citations and bibliographies.
+
+\subsection{Verbatim on slides}\label{sec:verbatim}\DescribeOption{verbatim}
+\pf{powerdot} has three different methods of processing slides, from
+which two have mainly been developed to make the inclusion of
+verbatim content\footnote{And other content that needs catcode
+changes when processing.} on slides easier. These methods can be
+accessed by the |method} key which is available in slide
+environments and the \Lcs{pdsetup} command (see
+section~\ref{sec:glopts}).
+\begin{description}
+\item\option{method=normal}\\
+This is the preset method for processing slides. It is fast and
+allows for overlays, but it does not allow for
+verbatim.\footnote{Except when it has been saved in a box outside
+the slide.}
+\item\option{method=direct}\\
+This method is also fast, but does not allow for overlays. Overlays
+will silently be disabled. However, it does allow for verbatim
+content on slides.
+\item\option{method=file}\\
+This method uses a temporary file to export the slide body to and
+read it back in. This method does allow for verbatim content and
+overlays, but could be slow when many slides use this method because
+the filesystem is used.
+\end{description}
+
+Below is an example demonstrating the use of all three different
+methods of slide processing.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \lstnewenvironment{code}{
+ \lstset{frame=single,escapeinside=`',
+ backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily}
+ }{}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide 1}
+ Normal \pause content.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=direct]{Slide 2}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{slide}[method=file]{Slide 3}
+ Steps 1 and 2:
+ \begin{code}
+ compute a;`\pause'
+ compute b;
+ \end{code}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+The first slide shows the default behavior for normal content. It
+produces two overlays. The second slide does not produce overlays,
+despite the use of the \Lcs{pause} command. This command has been
+disabled by choosing the |direct} method to process the verbatim
+content. The third slide has the same body as the second slide, but
+now does create two overlays, because the method using a temporary
+file has been chosen. Notice that we used \Lcs{pause} inside the listing,
+but that it can also be used outside the listing.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{twocolumn} command}\label{sec:twocolumn}
+\DescribeMacro{\twocolumn}
+The \Lcs{twocolumn} macro allows to split content into two columns.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{twocolumn}\oarg{options}\marg{left}\marg{right}'
+\end{command}
+This typesets \meta{left} and \meta{right} in two columns. The
+dimensions of those columns can be controlled by \meta{options}.
+Below are the available options.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{lineheight}\option{lineheight}\\
+If |lineheight} is specified, a line of the specified height will be
+created using \Lcs{psline} in between the two columns. Example:
+|lineheight=6cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{lineprop}\option{lineprop}\\
+Any \pf{pstricks} declaration to specify the line properties. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ lineprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt}
+\end{example}
+\item\DescribeOptions{lfrheight,lfrprop}\option{lfrheight,lfrprop}\\
+The first creates a frame of the specified height around the left
+column. The second is as |lineprop|, but for the left frame.
+\item\DescribeOptions{rfrheight,rfrprop}\option{rfrheight,rfrprop}\\
+As |lfrheight} and |lfrprop|, but for the right frame.
+\item\DescribeOptions{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\option{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\\
+Width of the left and right columns. Both are preset to: |0.47\linewidth|.
+\item\DescribeOption{frsep}\option{frsep}\\
+Space between text and the frames. Preset: |1.5mm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{colsep}\option{colsep}\\
+Space between the two columns. Preset: |0.06\linewidth|.
+\item\DescribeOption{topsep}\option{topsep}\\
+The extra space (additional to \Lcs{baselineskip|) between text above
+the columns and the text within the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{bottomsep}\option{bottomsep}\\
+Idem for the bottom of the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{indent}\option{indent}\\
+Horizontal indent left to the left column. Preset: |0cm|.
+\end{description}
+The dimensions described above are represented graphically in
+figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}.
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{pspicture}(0,.5)(13,10.5)
+\psline(0,0.5)(0,10)
+\rput[tl](.05,9.95){Top}
+\psframe[dimen=middle](1,9)(7,2)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,9)(11,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(8.5,9)
+\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(11,2)
+\qdisk(1.7,8.3){.1cm}
+\psset{linestyle=dashed}
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(1.7,3)
+\psline{C-C}(6.3,5)(6.3,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(11,9)(12,9)
+\psline{C-C}(11,2)(12,2)
+\psline{C-C}(11,7)(12,7)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(12,8.3)
+\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(9.2,3)
+\rput[tl](1.75,8.25){Left column text}
+\rput[tl](9.25,8.25){Right column text}
+\rput[tl](.05,1){Bottom}
+\psset{linestyle=dotted,dotsep=2pt}
+\psline(0,8.3)(1.7,8.3)
+\psline(0,9.6)(1,9.6)
+\psline(0,2)(1,2)
+\psline(0,1.1)(1,1.1)
+\psset{linestyle=solid}
+\psline{<->}(.2,8.33)(.2,9.57)
+\psline{<->}(4,8.33)(4,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(1.73,7)(6.27,7)
+\psline{<->}(1.03,6.5)(1.67,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(0.03,5.5)(1.67,5.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,7.4)(9.17,7.4)
+\psline{<->}(8.53,6.5)(9.17,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(6.33,6.5)(6.97,6.5)
+\psline{<->}(10.7,8.33)(10.7,8.97)
+\psline{<->}(7.3,8.97)(7.3,2.03)
+\psline{<->}(.2,1.13)(.2,1.97)
+\psline{->}(1.7,9.3)(1.7,8.45)
+\psline{<-}(9.23,7)(11,7)
+\cput(4,6.6){\small 1}
+\cput(11.1,6.6){\small 2}
+\cput(8,7){\small 3}
+\cput(7.7,3){\small 4}
+\cput(4.4,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(1.35,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(8.85,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(11.1,8.65){\small 5}
+\cput(6.65,6.1){\small 5}
+\cput(0.6,8.95){\small 6}
+\cput(0.6,5.1){\small 7}
+\cput(0.6,1.55){\small 8}
+\cput(1.7,9.6){\small 9}
+\end{pspicture}
+\begin{tabular}{c p{4cm}cl}
+\multicolumn{4}{c}{Meaning of the labels}\\\hline
+1&|lcolwidth|&5&|frsep|\\
+2&|rcolwidth|&6&|topsep|\\
+3&|colsep|&7&|indent|\\
+4&|lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,&8&|bottomsep|\\
+&|lineheight|&9&Reference point
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Two-column dimensions.}\label{fig:twocolumndim}
+\end{figure}
+Important to notice is that the \Lcs{twocolumn} macro uses the current
+cursor position as the reference point to position the first line of
+text of the left column (see also figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}). This
+means that optional frames can extend to the text on the previous
+line. Use for instance |topsep=0.3cm} in that case to add extra
+space between the two lines of text. The preset value of |topsep|
+is based on the situation that there is no text on top of the two
+columns. In that case, it is best to locate the first line of text
+of the left column at the same spot as text that is not created by
+|\twocolumn} on other slides. The setting |topsep=0cm} does exactly
+this. However, with a combination of |topsep} and |indent} you can
+change this behavior and position the first line of text of the left
+column anywhere you want.
+
+The \Lcs{twocolumn} macro computes the height of the construction to
+position text below the construction correctly. The computation is
+done by taking the maximum height of |lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,
+|lineheight} (if specified) and the left and right column content.
+Hence when frames nor a line is requested, |bottomsep} is the
+vertical space between the lowest line of text in the columns and
+the text below the columns (additional to \Lcs{baselineskip|). Here is
+an example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Two columns}
+ Here are two columns.
+ \twocolumn[
+ lfrprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt},
+ lfrheight=4cm,rfrheight=5cm,lineheight=3cm,topsep=0.3cm
+ ]{left}{right}
+ Those were two columns.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+Note that the use of the \pf{xkeyval} commands \Lcs{savevalue} and
+|\usevalue} \index{savevalue=\verb!*+\savevalue+|usage}
+\index{usevalue=\verb!*+\usevalue+|usage} could be handy here, for
+instance for copying the properties of the left frame to the right
+frame. This avoids typing them twice and avoids making errors
+resulting in different frames. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \twocolumn[
+ \savevalue{lfrheight}=3cm,
+ \savevalue{lfrprop}={
+ linestyle=dotted,framearc=.2,linewidth=3pt},
+ rfrheight=\usevalue{lfrheight},
+ rfrprop=\usevalue{lfrprop}
+ ]{left}{right}
+\end{example}
+See the \pf{xkeyval} documentation \cite{xkeyval} for more
+information about \Lcs{savevalue} and \Lcs{usevalue|.
+
+\section{Available styles}\label{sec:styles}
+\pf{powerdot} comes with a number of styles which are listed in the
+overview below. The characteristics of each style are described
+shortly and a sample of a title slide and a normal slide is provided
+for each style. Styles support the |wideslide} environment, have a
+table of contents on the left part of the paper in landscape
+orientation and on the bottom part in portrait orientation and
+support portrait orientation unless states otherwise.
+\begin{description}
+\item\pf{default}\\
+This style provides six different palettes. A flower in the top left
+corner decorates the slides for all palettes. The default palette is
+\texttt{blue} which has as main colors light blue and white. You can
+see an example of that palette below. Other available palettes are
+\texttt{red}, \texttt{green}, \texttt{yellow}, \texttt{brown} and
+\texttt{purple}.\\
+\styleexample{default}
+\item\pf{simple}\\
+This is a simple style in black and white. This style could be
+useful if you want to print your slides.\\
+\styleexample{simple}
+\item\pf{tycja}\\
+This style is set in shades of yellow and dark blue. The table of
+contents on slides is on the right side of the paper in landscape
+orientation and on the bottom part in portrait.\\
+\styleexample{tycja}
+\item\pf{ikeda}\\
+This style uses dark shades of red and blue and a light text color.
+It has nice patterns on the slide for decoration.\\
+\styleexample{ikeda}
+\item\pf{fyma}\\
+This style was originally created by Laurent Jacques for
+\pf{prosper}. Based on that style, he created a version for
+\pf{HA-prosper} with extended features. With his kind permission,
+this style has been converted by Shun'ichi J. Amano for
+\pf{powerdot}. The style has an elegant design with a light blue and
+white gradient background in the default \texttt{blue} palette.
+Other available palettes are \texttt{green}, \texttt{gray},
+\texttt{brown} and \texttt{orange}. It has special templates for
+sections on slides and sections on wide slides. Below is a sample of
+the blue palette.\\
+\styleexample{fyma}
+\item\pf{ciment}\\
+This style was originally created by Mathieu Goutelle for
+\pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper}. With his kind permission, this style
+has been converted for \pf{powerdot}. The style has a background
+that is hatched with light gray horizontal lines. Titles and table
+of contents highlighting are done with dark red.\\
+\styleexample{ciment}
+\item\pf{elcolors}\\
+This is a style using light shades of the elementary colors red,
+blue and yellow.\\
+\styleexample{elcolors}
+\item\pf{aggie}\\
+This style was created by Jack Stalnaker for \pf{HA-prosper} and he
+has converted this style for \pf{powerdot}. The style uses dark red
+and light brown colors.\\
+\styleexample{aggie}
+\item\pf{husky}\\
+This style is created by Jack Stalnaker and has a background of
+light gray sun beams combined with dark red highlights.\\
+\styleexample{husky}
+\item\pf{sailor}\\
+This style is contributed by Mael Hill\'ereau and supplies five
+different palettes: \texttt{Sea} (the default), \texttt{River},
+\texttt{Wine}, \texttt{Chocolate} and \texttt{Cocktail}. Below is a
+sample of the palette \texttt{Sea}.\\
+\styleexample{sailor}
+\item\pf{upen}\\
+This style has a nice dark blue background and text in yellow. It is
+contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
+\styleexample{upen}
+\item\pf{bframe}\\
+The \pf{bframe} style has blue frames on the slide in which text is
+positioned. The style is contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
+\styleexample{bframe}
+\item\pf{horatio}\\
+The \pf{horatio} style has been contributed by Michael Lundholm and
+is a more conservative blue style.\\
+\styleexample{horatio}
+\item\pf{paintings}\\
+This is a simple style without a table of contents on slides. It has
+been contributed by Thomas Koepsell and provides 10 different
+palettes. The colors used in the palettes are drawn from famous
+paintings.\footnote{The style defines a color \texttt{pdcolor7}
+which is not used in the style but comes from the same painting and
+complements the other colors. It can be used, for example, to
+highlight text against the main background color.} If you are
+interested, open the style file to read which paintings have been
+used. The available palettes are: \texttt{Syndics} (the default),
+\texttt{Skater}, \texttt{GoldenGate}, \texttt{Lamentation},
+\texttt{HolyWood}, \texttt{Europa}, \texttt{Moitessier},
+\texttt{MayThird}, \texttt{PearlEarring} and \texttt{Charon} (all
+case sensitive). Below is a sample of the \texttt{Syndics}
+palette.\\
+\styleexample{paintings}
+\item\pf{klope}\\
+The \pf{klope} style implements a horizontal table of contents that
+only lists the sections. The style is available in the following
+palettes: \texttt{Spring}, \texttt{PastelFlower}, \texttt{BlueWater}
+and \texttt{BlackWhite}. The \texttt{Spring} palette is the default
+and you can see a sample of that below.\\
+\styleexample{klope}
+\item\pf{jefka}\\
+The \pf{jefka} style comes with four palettes: \texttt{brown} (the
+default), \texttt{seagreen}, \texttt{blue} and \texttt{white}. Below
+you see a sample of the \texttt{brown} palette.\\
+\styleexample{jefka}
+\item\pf{pazik}\\
+This style is available in two palettes: \texttt{red} and
+\texttt{brown}. Below is a sample of the default \texttt{red}
+palette.\\
+\styleexample{pazik}
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Compiling your presentation}\label{sec:compiling}
+\subsection{Dependencies}\label{sec:dependencies}
+In table \ref{tab:dependencies} is a list of packages that
+\pf{powerdot} uses to perform specific tasks. Dependencies of
+packages in this table are not listed. In the table, `required'
+means that you should have a version \emph{at least} as new as
+listed and `tested' means that \pf{powerdot} was tested with this
+version, but that it could equally well work with an older or newer
+version than the one listed in the table. So, when trying to solve
+an error, first concentrate on solving version issues for the
+`required' packages. To find out which version of a package you are
+currently using, put \Lcs{listfiles} on the first line of your
+document, run it with \LaTeX, open the |.log} file and read the file
+list (see a \LaTeX\ manual for more information). If you need to
+update a package, you can get it from CTAN \cite{CTAN}.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{e}
+Package/file & Version & Date & Required/tested\\\hline
+\pf{xkeyval} \cite{xkeyval} & 2.5c & 2005/07/10 & required\\
+\texttt{pstricks.sty} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} & 0.2l & 2004/05/12 & required\\
+\pf{xcolor} \cite{xcolor} & 1.11 & 2004/05/09 & required\\
+\pf{enumitem} \cite{enumitem} & 1.0 & 2004/07/19 & required\\
+\pf{article} class & 1.4f & 2004/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{geometry} \cite{geometry} & 5.x & 2010/10/07 & tested\\
+\pf{hyperref} \cite{hyperref} & 6.74m & 2003/11/30 & tested\\
+\pf{graphicx} \cite{graphics} & 1.0f & 1999/02/16 & tested\\
+\pf{verbatim} & 1.5q & 2003/08/22 & tested
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Dependencies}\label{tab:dependencies}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Creating and viewing output}\label{sec:creation}
+To compile your presentation, run it with \LaTeX. The DVI that is
+produced this way can be viewed with MiK\TeX's DVI viewer
+YAP.\footnote{Unless you are using \pf{pstricks-add} which distorts
+the coordinate system in DVI.} Unfortunately, xdvi and kdvi (kile)
+do not support all PostScript specials and hence these will display
+the presentation incorrectly. If your DVI viewer does support
+this, make sure that your DVI display settings match that of the
+presentation. In case you are using the |screen} paper, you should
+set the DVI display setting to using the letter paper format. If
+your DVI viewer allows for custom paper formats, use 8.25 inch by 11
+inch.
+
+Note that certain things that are produced with PostScript or PDF
+techniques will not work in a DVI viewer. Examples are hiding of
+material via postscript layers (as is done, for instance, by
+|\pause|, see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and hyperlinks, for
+instance in the table of contents.
+
+If you want to produce a postscript document, run dvips over the DVI
+\emph{without any particular command line options related to
+orientation or paper size}. \pf{powerdot} will write information to
+the DVI file that helps dvips and ps2pdf (ghostscript) to create a
+proper document. If you have some reason that this does not work for
+you and you want to specify the paper and orientation yourself, you
+should use the |nopsheader} option that is described in
+section~\ref{sec:setup}. The PostScript document could, for
+instance, be used to put multiple slides on a page using the |psnup|
+utility.
+
+To create a PDF document for your presentation, run ps2pdf over the
+PS file created with dvips. Also here, you can \emph{leave out any
+command line arguments related to paper size or orientation}. If
+this is problematic for you somehow, use the |nopsheader} option as
+before and specify the paper and orientation at each intermediate
+step yourself.
+
+\section{Creating your own style}\label{sec:writestyle}
+\subsection{General information}
+Writing or customizing \pf{powerdot} styles is simple. If you want
+to modify a style or build a new one, locate the style that you want
+to use as basis in your \TeX\ tree (styles are named as
+|powerdot-<style_name>.sty|), copy that and rename it as to avoid
+license\footnote{The \LaTeX\ Public Project License requires
+renaming files when modifying them, see
+\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl}.} or naming conflicts. You
+might want to install the new style in your local \TeX\ tree to be
+able to access it from any place on your hard drive. See your
+\LaTeX\ distribution for more information.
+
+Once that has been taken care of, we can start creating the style.
+We strongly recommend to study a style file (for example,
+|powerdot-default.sty|) while reading the remainder of this section
+as it provides good examples for the content of this section.
+
+A style has several components. We describe these components below.
+\begin{description}
+\item\textbf{Identification and packages}\\
+This identifies the package in the log of a presentation and loads
+all required packages. The \pf{default} style contains something like:
+\begin{example}
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+ \ProvidesPackage{powerdot-default}[2005/10/09 v1.2 default style (HA)]
+ \RequirePackage{pifont}
+\end{example}
+See for more information about these commands a \LaTeX\ manual, for
+instance \cite{companion}.
+\item\textbf{Palette or color definitions}\\
+This section contains the definitions of palettes or colors that you
+want to use in the style. \pf{powerdot} uses \pf{xcolor} (via
+\pf{pstricks}). Hence, for more information about colors, see the
+\pf{xcolor} documentation. We will discuss palettes in more detail
+in section~\ref{sec:defpals}.
+\item\textbf{Template definitions}\\
+We will come back to this in sections~\ref{sec:deftemps}
+to~\ref{sec:defbg}.
+\item\textbf{Custom declarations}\\
+These can include anything that you want to be part of the style.
+The \pf{default} style, for instance, includes definitions for the labels
+in list environments like |itemize} and some initializations for
+lists in general (done with \Lcs{pdsetup|, see
+section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). This part could also include some
+customizations as described in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
+\item\textbf{Font initializations}\\
+This initializes font definitions (which can be done by
+loading a package like \pf{helvet}).
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Defining palettes}\label{sec:defpals}
+We will be defining templates formally in
+section~\ref{sec:deftemps}. For now, it's enough to have the general
+idea that a template controls the design of a slide. Palettes are
+sets of colors that color a template or design. A palette does not
+change the overall design of a template.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinepalettes}
+The following command can be used to define palettes for your style.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinepalettes}\marg{name1}\marg{cmds1}\dots'
+\end{command}
+This macro takes \emph{any} even number of mandatory arguments with
+a minimum of two. For every \meta{name}, a set of \meta{commands}
+can be given which define the palette with name \meta{name}. These
+commands can define colors with names |pdcolor1|, |pdcolor2|,
+etcetera. These colors can be used when designing the template (see
+section~\ref{sec:deftemps}). |pdcolor1} will always be used as text
+color.
+
+The user can access these palettes via the |palette} key for the
+|\pdsetup} command (see section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). If the user does
+not specify a palette, the first palette defined when compiling the
+presentation, will be used. Here is an example for defining 2
+palettes.
+\begin{example}
+ \pddefinepalettes{reds}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{1,0,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.2,0}
+ }{greens}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.1,1,0}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.2,1,0}
+ }
+\end{example}
+In this example, the |reds} palette is the default one. For more
+information about \Lcs{definecolor|, see the documentation of the
+\pf{xcolor} package \cite{xcolor}.
+
+Notice that it is not necessary to use the names |pdcolor2|,
+|pdcolor3} etcetera as color names. But if these colors are defined,
+\pf{powerdot} will use them, for instance, in the random dots
+feature (see section~\ref{sec:glopts}). The flexibility adds extra
+possibilities in setting up templates and palettes. See for an
+example of its use, the \pf{klope} style.
+
+\subsection{Defining templates}\label{sec:deftemps}
+We start off with a definition of what a template is. A template is
+a collection of settings for slide components together with custom
+definitions, which controls the visual appearance of a slide. A
+style can contain multiple templates.
+
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinetemplate}\oarg{basis}\marg{name}\marg{options}\marg{commands}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinetemplate}
+This defines the environment \meta{name} to produce a slide with
+characteristics determined by \meta{basis}, \meta{options} and
+\meta{commands}. We will discuss these elements in more detail
+in the coming sections.
+
+If you want to create several templates that differ only slightly
+from each other, define a \meta{basis} template, and then use it to
+define other templates. All \meta{options} and \meta{commands} for
+the new template \meta{name} will be appended to the existing list
+of \meta{options} and \meta{commands} from the \meta{basis}
+template.
+
+Make sure you choose a \emph{proper} name for the template, and
+avoid redefining existing templates or environments. \pf{powerdot}
+defines |blackslide|, |note} and |emptyslide} internally, so you
+shouldn't use these names unless you know what you're doing.
+Furthermore, each style needs to define at least the templates
+|slide} and |titleslide|. The |titleslide} environment will be used
+to create the title slide and |slide} will (by default) also be used
+to create section slides. Titles and sections are a bit special in
+the way they use the \meta{options} and will be discussed in more
+detail in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
+
+\subsection{Controlling setup}
+\DescribeOption{ifsetup}
+The \meta{options} (keys) are described in the following sections.
+You can control how these options apply to the various setups by
+using the |ifsetup} key. Any key appearing before the first
+|ifsetup} declaration in \meta{options} will apply to every possible
+setup. Once the |ifsetup} key is used, then all subsequent key
+declarations will apply \textit{only} to the setups declared in the
+|ifsetup} key. The |ifsetup} key can be used multiple times.
+
+By possible setups, we mean the allowed values of the |mode|,
+|paper|, |orient|, and |display} keys that are described in
+section~\ref{sec:classopts}. If a value (or values!) for any of
+these four keys is not specified in a |ifsetup} declaration, then
+all subsequent key declarations will apply to any layout of that
+type. Consider the following as an example.
+\begin{example}[numbers=left,numberstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,
+ escapeinside=`',numbersep=1em,xleftmargin=1em]
+ ...
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.3\slideheight},
+ ifsetup={portrait,screen},
+ textpos={.3\slidewidth,.2\slideheight}
+ ...
+ ifsetup=landscape,
+ ...
+ ifsetup,
+ ...
+\end{example}
+Assuming there was no |ifsetup} declaration before the first
+|textpos} declaration, this first |textpos} will apply to every
+possible setup. However, for the screen format in portrait
+orientation, the next |textpos} declaration will be used. In fact,
+all declarations that appear until we switch to the next |ifsetup|
+(which specifies all paper sorts and only landscape orientation)
+will be used in the portrait screen layout. All keys after the next
+|ifsetup} declaration will be used in landscape orientation,
+\emph{with any paper, mode and display}. If, after declaring some
+specializations, you want to switch back to settings that apply to
+all possible setups, set |ifsetup} to empty as is done in the
+example. All subsequent declarations will then again be applied
+under any setup.
+
+The following command is a stand-alone implementation of the
+mechanism described above. It allows you to control the setup
+outside the \meta{options} argument of the \Lcs{pddefinetemplate|
+command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pdifsetup}\marg{desired}\marg{true}\marg{false}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pdifsetup}
+This macro executes \meta{true} when the setup that the user chose
+matches with the \meta{desired} setup, \meta{false} in all other cases.
+For instance, if the user has chosen landscape, then
+\begin{example}
+ \pdifsetup{landscape}{yes}{no}
+\end{example}
+will typeset |yes|. If the user would have chosen portrait instead,
+then |no} would have been typeset.
+
+This macro can be used to check setup requests from the user and,
+for instance, generate an error if a certain setup is not supported
+by your style. \pf{powerdot} provides one predefined error message
+which can be used in one of the first lines of your style.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pd@noportrait}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@noportrait}
+This macro generates an error when the user requests portrait
+orientation. Notice that the handout mode only works in portrait
+orientation. This macro takes that into account and doesn't generate
+an error in the case that the user requested a handout.
+
+\subsection{Main components}\label{sec:maincomps}
+The \meta{options} control several key components of a slide. Every
+component has several properties. A key that can be used in the
+\meta{options} argument is the name of the component postfixed by
+its property that you want to control.
+
+The components |title|, |text|, |toc|, |stoc} and |ntoc} have
+properties |hook|, |pos|, |width} and |font|. Additionally, the
+|text} component has a |height} property. The components |lf|, |cf} and
+|rf} have properties |hook|, |pos|, |temp} and |font|. Hence,
+examples of valid keys are |titlefont|, |tocpos} and |lftemp|. All
+components and properties will be discussed below.
+
+Here is an overview of the components that can be controlled from
+the \meta{options} argument in \Lcs{pddefinetemplate|.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{title-}\option{title-}\\
+The slide title.
+\item\DescribeOption{text-}\option{text-}\\
+The main text box on the slide.
+\item\DescribeOption{toc-}\option{toc-}\\
+The (full) table of contents on a slide containing sections and
+slides.
+\item\DescribeOption{stoc-}\option{stoc-}\\
+This is a table of contents containing only the sections. See also
+|ntoc} below.
+\item\DescribeOption{ntoc-}\option{ntoc-}\\
+This is a table of contents containing only the entries for the
+active section. Together with |stoc|, this can be used to create a
+split table of contents. In a particular template, one would usually
+have a |toc|, a combination of |stoc} and |ntoc} or no table of
+contents at all.
+\item\DescribeOptions{lf-,cf-,rf-}\option{lf-,cf-,rf-}\\
+The left, center and right footers.
+\end{description}
+
+Notice that all positioning of components described above will be
+done with \Lcs{rput} from \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}
+internally. See the \pf{pstricks} documentation for more information
+about this command. It should also be noted that all components
+(except |lf|, |cf} and |rf|) put their content in a |minipage|
+environment.
+
+Now we list all properties of the components listed above and
+describe what they mean. Remember that keys are formed by combining
+a component name and a property.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{-hook}\option{-hook}\\
+This option defines the \Lcs{rput} hook that will be used when
+positioning the item. This can be |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
+|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B} and |c|. See the \pf{pstricks}
+documentation for more information.
+\item\DescribeOption{-pos}\option{-pos}\\
+This defines the position of the |hook} on the paper. The lower left
+corner of the paper is given by the point |{0,0}} and the upper right
+corner by the point |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|. So if you want to
+position the main text box at 20\ from the left edge and 30\ from
+the top edge of the paper, you have to do the following.
+\begin{example}
+ textpos={.2\slidewidth,.7\slideheight}
+\end{example}
+If the position of any component has not been specified, this
+component will not be placed on the slide. This gives an opportunity
+to design slides without footers or table of contents, for instance.
+\item\DescribeOption{-width}\option{-width}\\
+The width of the component. All component positioned by
+\pf{powerdot} will be put in a surrounding |minipage} environment.
+The |width} property determines the width of the |minipage|. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ textwidth=.7\slidewidth
+\end{example}
+This property does not exist for the |lf|, |cf} and |rf} components.
+\item\DescribeOption{-height}\option{-height}\\
+This option is only available for the |text} component. In other
+words, for this property, there is only one key, namely
+|textheight|. This can be used to specify the height of the
+|minipage} used for the main text. This does not imply that users
+are restricted to this length or that \pf{powerdot} does automatic
+slide breaking. This height is only used for vertical alignments of
+material, for instance by footnotes. The preset value is
+|\slideheight|.
+\item\DescribeOption{-font}\option{-font}\\
+This will be inserted just before the text that is about to be
+typeset. This can be used to declare deviations from the main text
+font and color. It can be a font declaration, like
+|\large\bfseries|, but can also contain other things like
+|\color{red}} or \Lcs{raggedright|.
+\item\DescribeOption{-temp}\option{-temp}\\
+This property is only available for the footers (|lf|, |cf} and |rf|) and
+can be used to change the template of the footers. This means that
+you can, for instance, add content to the footer, besides the
+content specified by the user. The default declaration by
+\pf{powerdot} is the following.
+\begin{example}
+ rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty
+ \else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide
+\end{example}
+Here \Lcs{pd@@rf} will contain the content of the right footer defined
+by the user via the \Lcs{pdsetup} command. Similarly, \Lcs{pd@@lf|
+contains the content of the left footer. The above declaration
+checks whether the footer and \Lcs{theslide} are both non-empty and if
+so, it inserts } -- } to separate both.
+\item\DescribeOption{-orient}\option{-orient}\\
+This property is only available for the |toc|, |stoc} and |ntoc|
+components. This property can be |h} or |v} and determines the
+orientation of the table of contents. The preset is |v|. See
+also section~\ref{sec:slidetoc} for more information about the
+construction of the table of contents.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Slide toc}\label{sec:slidetoc}
+The small table of contents that is placed on slides can be
+controlled by four macros and several options.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocslide}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocsection}
+These macros take one argument. When building the table of contents,
+\pf{powerdot} first passes the content through \Lcs{pd@tocslide} or
+|\pd@tocsection|, depending on the type of entry that it is building
+at that moment. You could, for instance, do
+\begin{example}
+ \def\pd@tocslide#1{$\bullet$\ #1}
+ \def\pd@tocsection#1{#1}
+\end{example}
+which will prefix all normal entries (not the sections) with a
+bullet. By default, these two macros are defined to just pass on
+their argument.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocdisplay}
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@tochighlight}
+These two macros also take one argument. After processing an entry
+with the command \Lcs{pd@tocslide} or \Lcs{pd@tocsection|, \pf{powerdot}
+continues building the entry by passing it through \Lcs{pd@tocdisplay|,
+when the entry needs to be displayed only, or \Lcs{pd@tochighlight|,
+when the entry needs to be highlighted. These macros are a little
+more involved and take care of putting the content in the proper
+font and color in a |minipage|. Further, \Lcs{pd@tochighlight} also
+puts a box around the item.
+
+Notice, that by default, both the separate table of contents entries
+as well as the table of contents as a whole are typeset in
+|minipage} environments by these macros, in case the table of
+contents is vertical. The |-width} properties then determines the
+width of the table of contents and, together with |tocsecindent} and
+|tocslideindent} (see below) the width of the individual entries. If
+it is horizontal, only the separate entries will be in |minipage|s
+and the table of contents itself not and the |-width} properties
+determine only the width of the individual entries (together with
+|tocsecindent} and |tocslideindent|).
+
+Several aspects of the process of generating the table of contents
+can be controlled via the keys that are available in the
+|\pddefinetemplate} command that will be described below. If these
+keys do not provide enough handles to do what you want, you might
+need to have a look at the two macros in the source and decide to
+rewrite them in your style as to fit your needs. An example can be
+found in the \pf{fyma} style.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{tocfrsep}\option{tocfrsep}\\
+This length is the distance between the box around the content
+created by the |minipage} and the highlight frame box created by
+|\pd@tochighlight|. Preset: |0.5mm|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecsep}\option{tocsecsep}\\
+The distance inserted before a section (unless it is the
+first element in the table of contents). Preset: |2ex|.
+Notice that if the orientation of the table of contents is set to
+vertical, this length creates a vertical skip, otherwise, it creates
+a horizontal skip.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocslidesep}\option{tocslidesep}\\
+The distance inserted before other entries (unless it is the
+first element in the table of contents). Preset: |0ex|. Like
+|tocsecsep|, the effect of this length depends on the orientation of
+the table of contents.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecindent}\option{tocsecindent}\\
+The horizontal space left to a section entry. Preset: |0pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocslideindent}\option{tocslideindent}\\
+The horizontal space left to a slide entry. The horizontal skip will
+not be inserted left to slide entries that appear before the first
+section. Preset: |0pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tocsecm}\option{tocsecm}\\
+This is inserted just before typesetting a section. This can be used
+to mark a section, for instance with a line as in the \pf{default}
+style. Preset: empty.
+\item\DescribeOption{toctcolor}\option{toctcolor}\\
+This is the text color used for non-highlighted elements in the
+table of contents. Preset: |black|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tochltcolor}\option{tochltcolor}\\
+This is the text color used for highlighted elements in the table of
+contents. Preset: |white|.
+\item\DescribeOption{tochlcolor}\option{tochlcolor}\\
+This is the color used for the frame behind highlighted elements.
+Preset: |black|.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Miscellaneous options}\label{sec:miscoptions}
+There are some options that fall outside of the scope of the previous
+sections. These will be discussed here.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOption{iacolor}\option{iacolor}\\
+The |iacolor} option can be used to specify the color that is used
+for inactive things, produced for instance by \Lcs{onslide|, \Lcs{pause|
+(see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and \Lcs{tableofcontents} (see
+section~\ref{sec:tableofcontents}). As \pf{xcolor} is used by
+\pf{powerdot}, one can use special notation here, like
+\begin{example}
+ iacolor=black!20
+\end{example}
+The preset value for this key is |lightgray|.
+\end{description}
+
+The following options control the digital clock (see
+section~\ref{sec:classopts}). The clock is a form text field with
+dynamic content, driven by a javascript via \pf{hyperref} text
+fields. Some options for the clock work similarly as for, for
+instance, the title component, but there are also special options.
+\begin{description}
+\item\DescribeOptions{clockhook,clockpos}\option{clockhook,clockpos}\\
+These work in the same way as the |-hook} and |-pos} properties
+discussed in section~\ref{sec:maincomps}. The preset value of
+|clockhook} is |tr|.
+\item\DescribeOptions{clockwidth,clockheight}\option{clockwidth,clockheight}\\
+These control the width and height of the text field containing the
+clock. Preset values come from \pf{hyperref} and are |3cm} and
+|\baselineskip|, respectively.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockcharsize}\option{clockcharsize}\\
+The size of characters of the clock. Preset: |14pt|.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockalign}\option{clockalign}\\
+The alignment of the clock in the text field. |0} is left-aligned,
+|1} is centered and |2} is right aligned. Preset is |2|.
+\item\DescribeOption{clockcolor}\option{clockcolor}\\
+This determines the text color of the clock. The value should be a
+named color. The preset value is |black|.
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Template presets}
+Below, we have copied the preset setting for the keys described
+above. These will be used if you didn't supply other input for these
+keys in a particular template. If the preset value meets your
+needs, you don't have to specify it again in your style.
+\begin{example}
+ titlehook=Bl,titlepos=,titlewidth=\slidewidth,
+ titlefont=\raggedright,texthook=tl,textpos=,
+ textwidth=\slidewidth,textfont=\raggedright,
+ textheight=\slideheight,
+ tochook=tl,tocpos=,tocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ stochook=tl,stocpos=,stocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ stocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ ntochook=tl,ntocpos=,ntocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
+ ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
+ tocorient=v,stocorient=v,ntocorient=v,
+ tocfrsep=.5mm,tocsecsep=2ex,tocslidesep=0ex,
+ tocsecm=,toctcolor=black,tochlcolor=black,tochltcolor=white,
+ tocsecindent=0pt,tocslideindent=0pt,
+ lfhook=Bl,lfpos=,lffont=\scriptsize,lftemp=\pd@@lf,
+ cfhook=B,cfpos=,cffont=\scriptsize,cftemp=\pd@@cf,
+ rfhook=Br,rfpos=,rffont=\scriptsize,rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf
+ \@empty\else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide,
+ iacolor=lightgray,
+ clockhook=tr,clockpos=,clockwidth=3cm,clockheight=\baselineskip,
+ clockcharsize=14pt,clockalign=2,clockcolor=black
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{The background}\label{sec:defbg}
+This leaves only one argument of the \Lcs{pddefinetemplate} macro
+undiscussed. This is the \meta{commands} argument. This argument can
+contain any code that you want to execute \textit{after} setting the
+options and \textit{before} building the slide components like the
+slide title, main text, and footers. This argument is designed to
+contain declarations that will build the background of a template
+using, for instance, \pf{pstricks}, but it can also hold other
+commands you might need for building your template.
+
+Important to notice is that these commands may not create \TeX\
+material as that might destroy the construction of the slide. So, if
+you want to place the word `Hello' in the bottom left corner of the
+slide, don't type `Hello', but make its width, height and depth
+equal to zero, for instance by using \pf{pstricks}' \Lcs{rput|.
+\begin{example}
+ \rput[bl](0,0){Hello}
+\end{example}
+
+\subsection{Title slide, titles and sections}\label{sec:specialtemps}
+As mentioned before, the style that you write needs to define at
+least the templates |slide} and |titleslide|. The latter treats some
+of the keys in a special way. Besides, a section slide is also done
+in a special way.
+
+The title slide (made with \Lcs{maketitle|) puts the title with
+author(s) and date in the main text box. This means that you have to
+supply a position for the main text box (|textpos|). It will use the
+main text font for the text (together with declarations in the
+|textfont} key) for the author(s) and the date. But it will use the
+declarations in |titlefont} for the title of the presentation. This
+is done so that title and author(s) form a coherent block and to
+make sure that long titles can push down the author(s) instead of
+overwriting it.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\pd@slidetitle}
+The \Lcs{pd@slidetitle} macro is used to typeset the slide title on
+slides. This macro is comparable to for instance \Lcs{pd@tocslide|. The
+macro takes one argument which is the slide title in the right font
+and formatting. By default, this macro just passes on the content
+for typesetting, but you could redefine this macro so do something
+with its input prior to typesetting it. An example is in the
+\pf{fyma} style which underlines the title after putting it in a
+|minipage} to support multi line titles.
+
+\DescribeMacros{\pd@title,\pd@sectiontitle}
+These macros are similar to \Lcs{pd@slidetitle} and typeset the title
+on the title slide and the title on section slides respectively. By
+default, these also pass there argument (which is the presentation
+title or section title), but these can be redefined to do something
+with the input prior to typesetting it, just as \Lcs{pd@slidetitle|.
+
+\DescribeOptions{sectemp,widesectemp}
+The \Lcs{section} command uses (by default) the |slide} environment and
+puts the section title in the title box with font |titlefont|. If
+you want to change the default use of the |slide} environment for
+sections to, for instance, the |sectionslide} environment or any
+other especially designed section template, change the section
+template preset in your style, using
+\begin{example}
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide}
+\end{example}
+This means that if the user asks for |template=slide} in the
+|\section} command, the |sectionslide} environment will be used
+silently. To avoid surprises, |sectionslide} should preferably be
+based on the |slide} environment.
+
+A similar option is available in case the user asks for
+|template=wideslide|. One could for instance do the following.
+\begin{example}
+ \setkeys[pd]{section}{widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
+\end{example}
+Whenever the user requests a |wideslide} to be used for a
+|\section|, instead, the |sectionwideslide} environment will be
+used. Other input to the |template} key by the user does not get a
+special treatment.
+
+Notice that these keys are available in the |section} family of keys
+and that you cannot use them in the \Lcs{pddefinetemplate} command.
+
+\subsection{Testing the style}\label{sec:styletest}
+\pf{powerdot} has a test file that should test most of the style.
+This test file can be produced by running \LaTeX\ over
+|powerdot.dtx|. This generates |powerdot-styletest.tex} which will
+help you with the testing job. Feel free to contact us when you
+would like to contribute your style to \pf{powerdot}. See also
+section~\ref{sec:questions}.
+
+\section{Using \LyX\ for presentations}\label{sec:lyx}
+\LyX\ \cite{LyXWeb} is a WYSIWYM (What You See Is What You Mean)
+document processor based on \LaTeX. It supports standard \LaTeX\
+classes but needs special files, called layout files, in order to
+support non-standard classes such as \pf{powerdot}.
+
+To start using \LyX\ for \pf{powerdot} presentations, copy the
+layout file |powerdot.layout} to the \LyX\ layout directory. You can
+find this file in the doc tree of your \LaTeX\ installation:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find it there, download
+it from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. Once that is
+done, reconfigure \LyX\ (\texttt{Edit\LyXarrow Reconfigure} and
+restart \LyX\ afterwards). Now you can use the \pf{powerdot}
+document class as any other supported class. Go to
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} and select \texttt{powerdot
+presentation} as document class. For more information, see the \LyX\
+documentation, which is accessible from the |Help} menu.
+
+\subsection{How to use the layout}
+The \pf{powerdot} \LyX\ layout provides some environments\footnote{Don't
+confuse these with \LaTeX\ environments.} which can be used in \LyX.
+Some of these environments (for instance |Title} or |Itemize|) are
+natural to use since they exist also in the standard document
+classes such as \pf{article}. For more information on these standard
+environments, see the \LyX\ documentation.
+
+This section will explain how to use the \pf{powerdot} specific
+environments |Slide|, |WideSlide|, |EmptySlide} and |Note|. These
+environments correspond to the \pf{powerdot} environments |slide|,
+|emptyslide|, |wideslide} and |note|.
+
+We start with a simple example. The following \LaTeX\ code
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{Slide title}
+ Slide content.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+can be obtained using the following \LyX\ environments. The right
+column represents the text typed into the \LyX\ window and the left
+column represents the environment applied to this text).
+\begin{example}
+ Slide Slide title
+ Standard Slide content.
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+Some remarks concerning this example.
+\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
+\item You can use the environment menu (under the menu bar, top-left
+corner) to change the environment applied to text.
+\item The slide title should be typed on the line of the |Slide|
+environment.
+\item |EndSlide} finishes the slide and its line is left blank.
+\end{itemize}
+
+In the \LyX\ window, the |Slide} environment (that is, the slide
+title) is displayed in magenta, the |WideSlide} style in green, the
+|EmptySlide} style in cyan and the |Note} style in red and hence
+these are easily identifiable.
+
+Here is another example.
+\begin{example}
+ \begin{slide}{First slide title}
+ The first slide.
+ \end{slide}
+ \begin{note}{First note title}
+ The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ \end{note}
+ \begin{slide}{Second slide title}
+ The second slide.
+ \end{slide}
+\end{example}
+This can be done in \LyX\ in the following way.
+\begin{example}
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ Note First note title
+ Standard The first note, concerning slide 1.
+ Slide Second slide title
+ Standard The second slide.
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+This example demonstrates that it is often sufficient to insert the
+|EndSlide} style after the last slide or note only. Only when you
+want certain material not to be part of a slide, you need to finish
+the preceding slide manually using the |EndSlide} style. Example:
+\begin{example}
+ Slide First slide title
+ Standard The first slide.
+ EndSlide
+ [ERT box with some material]
+ Slide Second slide title
+ ...
+\end{example}
+
+Options can be passed to slide environments by using
+\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the slide title.
+The following example uses the |direct} method (see
+section~\ref{sec:verbatim}) in the short title argument (delimited by
+square brackets) to allow for a |lstlisting} environment (defined by
+the \pf{listings} package) within the slide content.
+\begin{example}
+ Slide [method=direct]Example of LaTeX source code
+ Standard Here's the \HelloWorld command:
+ [ERT box:
+ \lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+ \newcommand{\HelloWorld}{Hello World!}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ ]
+ EndSlide
+\end{example}
+Note that you are not obliged to use a |verbatim} environment to
+type the \Lcs{HelloWord} text into the \LyX\ window because \LyX\
+directly supports standard verbatim.\footnote{\LyX\ translates
+special characters into their corresponding \LaTeX\ command. For
+instance, the backslash character is translated into
+\cs{textbackslash{}}. Resulting, the font is not the same as in true
+verbatim and you might want to change that via the
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Character} dialog.} Consequently, the use of
+the slide processing methods |direct} and |file} is not necessary
+when you need standard verbatim, but it is necessary when doing more
+advanced things, like in the example above.
+
+\subsection{Support of syntax}
+This section lists options, commands and environments that are
+supported through the \LyX\ interface directly, without using an ERT
+box (\TeX-mode).
+
+All class options (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}) are supported
+via the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog (|Layout} pane).
+Options for the \Lcs{pdsetup} command (see section~\ref{sec:setup})
+should be specified in the |Preamble} pane of the
+\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog.
+
+Table \ref{tab:lyxcommands} lists the \pf{powerdot} commands that
+are supported in \LyX.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\cs{title} & Use \texttt{Title} environment.\\
+\cs{author} & Use \texttt{Author} environment.\\
+\cs{date} & Use \texttt{Date} environment.\\
+\cs{maketitle} & Managed directly by \LyX.\\
+\cs{section} & Use the \texttt{Section} environment. Options to this
+command (see section~\ref{sec:section}) can be specified using
+\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the section title.\\
+\cs{tableofcontents} & Use \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Lists \&
+TOC\LyXarrow Table of contents}. You will need an ERT box if you
+want to use the optional argument, see below.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} commands in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxcommands}
+\end{table}
+Table \ref{tab:lyxenvs} lists the \pf{powerdot} environments that,
+besides the earlier discussed |slide|, |wideslide|, |note} and
+|emptyslide} environments, are supported in \LyX.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Environment & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{itemize} & Use \texttt{Itemize} and \texttt{ItemizeType1}
+environments. The latter will create a list with |type=1} (see
+section~\ref{sec:lists}).\\
+\texttt{enumerate} & Use \texttt{Enumerate} and
+\texttt{EnumerateType1} environments.\\
+\texttt{thebibliography} & Use \texttt{Bibliography} environment.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} environments in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxenvs}
+\end{table}
+Table \ref{tab:lyxERT} lists commands that can only be done by using
+an ERT box (via \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow TeX}).
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\cs{and} & Within \texttt{Author} environment.\\
+\cs{pause} & \\
+\cs{item} & An ERT box is only required for the optional argument,
+not mandatory for overlays specifications.\\
+\cs{onslide} & And the versions \cs{onslide+} and \cs{onslide*}.\\
+\cs{twocolumn} & \\
+\cs{tableofcontents} & Only when using the optional argument.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{\pf{powerdot} commands needing an ERT box in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxERT}
+\end{table}
+Note that you may use the clipboard in order to repeat often used
+commands like \Lcs{pause|. Finally, table \ref{tab:lyxadd} lists
+additional commands and environments that are supported by the layout.
+\begin{table}[htb]
+\centering
+\begin{tabular}{f}
+Env./Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
+\texttt{quote} & Use \texttt{Quote} environment.\\
+\texttt{quotation} & Use \texttt{Quotation} environment.\\
+\texttt{verse} & Use \texttt{Verse} environment.\\
+\cs{caption} & Use \texttt{Caption} environment within standard
+float environments.
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Additional environments for \LyX}\label{tab:lyxadd}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Compiling with \LyX}
+First of all, make sure that you have also read
+section~\ref{sec:compiling}. Then, in order to get a proper
+PostScript or PDF file, you have to set your \LyX\ document
+properties depending on which paper and orientation you want. When
+your \LyX\ document is open, go to the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow
+Document} dialog. In the \texttt{Layout} pane, put the |nopsheader|,
+|orient} and |paper} keys as class options (see
+section~\ref{sec:classopts} for a description). Then, go to the
+|Paper} pane and select corresponding paper size and orientation
+(you may choose |letter} paper in the case you set |paper=screen} in
+the class options). Finally, go to the |View} (or
+\texttt{File\LyXarrow Export}) menu and select your output
+(PostScript or PDF).
+
+\subsection{Extending the layout}
+If you have created a custom style (see section~\ref{sec:writestyle})
+which defines custom templates, you may want to extend the layout
+file\footnote{The LPPL dictates to rename a file if you modify it as
+to avoid confusion.} so that these templates are also supported in
+\LyX. The explanation below assumes that you have defined a template
+called |sunnyslide|.
+
+To support this new template in \LyX, you have to use the following
+command.
+\begin{command}
+ `\cs{pddefinelyxtemplate}\meta{cs}\marg{template}'
+\end{command}
+\DescribeMacro{\pddefinelyxtemplate}
+This will define the control sequence \meta{cs} such that it will
+create a slide with template \meta{template} (which has been defined
+using \Lcs{pddefinetemplate|. This new control sequence can be used in
+the layout file as follows.
+\begin{example}
+ # SunnySlide environment definition
+ Style SunnySlide
+ CopyStyle Slide
+ LatexName lyxend\lyxsunnyslide
+ Font
+ Color Yellow
+ EndFont
+ Preamble
+ \pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxsunnyslide{sunnyslide}
+ EndPreamble
+ End
+\end{example}
+Note that you must begin the |LatexName} field with |lyxend|. The
+definition of the \LyX\ template has been inserted in between
+|Preamble} and |EndPreamble} which assures that the new \LyX\
+environment will work in every presentation. After modifying the
+layout file, don't forget to restart \LyX. See for more information
+about creating \LyX\ environments, the documentation of \LyX\ in the
+|Help} menu.
+
+\section{Questions}\label{sec:questions}
+\subsection{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{sec:FAQ}
+This section is devoted to Frequently Asked Questions. Please read
+it carefully; your problem might be solved by this section.
+\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt]
+\question
+Does \pf{powerdot} have example files? Where can I find them?
+\answer
+\pf{powerdot} comes with several examples that should be in the doc
+tree of your \LaTeX\ installation. More precisely:
+\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find them there,
+download them from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}
+\cite{CTAN}.
+\question I'm getting errors or unexpected output when compiling
+the simplest example!
+\answer Did you read section~\ref{sec:compiling}?
+\question I made a typo in the slide code, ran the file, got an
+error, corrected the typo and reran, but now get an error that
+doesn't go away.
+\answer Remove the |.bm} and |.toc} files and try again.
+\question \Lcs{pause} does not work in the |align|\footnote{There are
+several environments doing similar things as \texttt{align}. Another
+example is the \texttt{split} environment, but more (often from the
+\pf{amsmath} package) can cause similar trouble for \cs{pause}.}
+environment.
+\answer |align} does several tricky things, which make it impossible
+to use \Lcs{pause|. Use \Lcs{onslide} instead. See
+section~\ref{sec:onslide}.
+\question My \pf{pstricks} nodes appear on all overlays. Also: color
+doesn't seem to work with \Lcs{onslide|.
+\answer Some PostScript tricks like nodes and color do not work with
+|\onslide|. Use \Lcs{onslide*} instead. See an example below.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \usepackage{pst-node}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Color}
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{A}}
+ This is {\onslide*{2-}{\color{red}} red} text.
+ \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{B}}
+ \onslide{2}{\ncline{A}{B}}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+\question Do I need to edit style files to change a style a bit?
+\answer No, you do not need to edit any style file. You can change
+any part of a certain style using the \Lcs{pddefinetemplate} and
+|\pddefinepalettes} commands. Here is an example that removes the
+left and right footers from the \pf{default} style, places the slide
+number in the center footer and adds another palette.
+\begin{example}
+ \documentclass{powerdot}
+ \pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{
+ lfpos=,rfpos=,cftemp=\theslide
+ }{}
+ \pddefinepalettes{mypalette}{
+ \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.27,.31,.44}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.85,.85,.92}
+ \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.8,.75,.98}
+ }
+ \pdsetup{palette=mypalette}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{slide}{Title}
+ \end{slide}
+ \end{document}
+\end{example}
+See section~\ref{sec:writestyle} for more information about these
+two commands.
+\question Can I contribute to this project?
+\answer
+Certainly. If you find bugs\footnote{Make sure that you confirm that
+the bug is really caused by \pf{powerdot} and not by another package
+that you use.} or typos, please send a message to the mailinglist
+(see section~\ref{sec:mailinglist}). If you have developed your own
+style that is distinct from existing styles and would like to see it
+included in \pf{powerdot}, please inform us by private e-mail and we
+will consider your contribution. Notice that included contributions
+will fall under the overall \pf{powerdot} license and copyright
+notice, but that your name will be included in the documentation
+when you make a contribution. This is done to guarantee that we can
+adapt files if maintenance is needed.
+\end{itemize}
+
+If your question has not been answered at this point, advance to the
+next section to read where to find more answers.
+
+\subsection{Mailinglist}\label{sec:mailinglist}
+\pf{powerdot} has a mailinglist from \url{freelists.org} and has its
+website here:
+\begin{center}
+\url{http://www.freelists.org/list/powerdot}
+\end{center}
+There is a link to `List Archive'. Please search this archive before
+posting a question. Your problem might already have been solved in
+the past.
+
+If that is not the case, use the box on the page to type your e-mail
+address, choose the action `Subscribe' and click `Go!'. Then follow
+the instructions that arrive to you by e-mail. At a certain moment,
+you can login for the first time using an authorization code sent to
+you by e-mail. After logging in, you can create a password for
+future sessions using the `Main Menu' button. The other buttons
+provide you some info and options for your account.
+
+When you are all set, you can write to the list by sending an e-mail
+to
+\begin{center}
+\url{powerdot [at] freelists [dot] org}
+\end{center}
+
+When writing to the list, please keep in mind the following very
+important issues.
+\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
+\item We are volunteers!
+\item Keep your questions related to \pf{powerdot}.
+\item Always supply a \emph{minimal} example demonstrating your
+problem.
+\item Don't send big files over the list.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+We hope you will enjoy this service.
+
+\section{Source code documentation}\label{sec:source}
+In case you want regenerate the package files from the source or
+want to have a look at the source code description, locate
+|powerdot.dtx|, search in the file for \Lcs{OnlyDescription} and remove
+that and do
+\begin{example}
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ bibtex powerdot
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+ latex powerdot.dtx
+\end{example}
+
+\StopEventually{}
+
+\section{Implementation}\label{sec:imple}
+\subsection{General construction}
+This section explains the general idea of the class, how paper
+dimensions are chosen and how slides are created. We start with the
+paper.
+
+This class uses the same idea as \pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper},
+namely that we create a background with \pf{pstricks} and position
+text on it using \Lcs{rput} and some |minipage} environments. This is
+easier than writing a dedicated output routine that can handle all
+the material, but doesn't break pages when we don't want that. So,
+when starting to write the class, we first investigated how to deal
+with landscape slides and paper dimensions.
+
+The job of making landscape slides can be done using \pf{geometry}.
+The paper dimension was more of a problem. As \LaTeX\ doesn't have
+the huge fonts that we need for presentations, we need to scale the
+usual fonts somehow. This could be done by using unusual paper
+dimensions (as \pf{beamer} does) and hence relying on ps2pdf to cut
+off all the redundant material. But this doesn't produce a usable
+DVI or PS file. Instead, it was chosen to use DVI magnification. The
+entire slide is magnified by a factor of 2 and only the top left
+quarter of the paper is used (but you will never notice that due to
+the magnification). As we already decided to place all material in
+|minipage|s using \Lcs{rput|, we didn't need the page anymore and it
+was easiest to use \pf{geometry} to just remove the page margins
+altogether so that the bottom left corner would be |(0,0)} and the
+top right corner |(\slidewidth,\slideheight)|.
+
+One extra remark on the paper type is necessary. We found that most
+common configurations of dvips use the |A4size} code when A4
+dimensions are found. This code doesn't write an explicit PostScript
+paper command in the PS document and hence programs using this PS
+(like ps2pdf) don't know what paper to use and revert to the
+default, which is letter paper in most cases. This, of course, is
+something that we don't want and hence, \pf{powerdot} will write
+these commands to the PS itself as to guarantee proper post
+processing of the PS.
+
+Now that we made the decisions on how to create proper DVI, PS and
+PDF output, the next task was to create an easy interface to
+overlays. To avoid counting the overlays as is necessary with
+\pf{prosper}, we implemented a system that first collects the entire
+body of an environment in a macro which can be reused multiple
+times. During execution of the body, the overlay commands like
+|\onslide} will keep a record of the biggest number that they find
+and that is the number of overlays to produce. Getting the body of
+the environment is done by collecting all material up to the next
+|\end} occurrence. If that control sequence has the proper argument
+(namely the slide that we started with), then we stop scanning and
+start processing the slide. With normal use, you will not notice
+this, but when doing special tricks like hiding \Lcs{end{slide}} in a
+macro, the process will fail as it relies on finding \Lcs{end\{slide\}}
+in the input stream without doing expansions. Often a work around
+can be found though. Have a look for instance at how \Lcs{section|
+creates a slide.
+
+The next task was to provide a simple way to create templates. As
+the class is based on the idea of having a background with some
+material spread out over it, the template system follows this idea.
+One argument can be used to create the background, the other
+argument controls, via keys and options, several properties of the
+material that should be placed. By adding an \verb=ifsetup= key, full
+control could be gained over the design of the template in every
+possible setup chosen by the user.
+
+The final task for the class was to fill in all the `details'. All
+the mechanisms were present, but sometimes they should not be
+active. For instance, overlays should not be created in handout
+mode. Other things to add to the class were counter protection on
+overlays, handles to the layout of the slide number, footnotes, a
+bibliography environment, empty slides, etcetera.
+
+We hope that this section has made clear a little bit what you will
+be seeing when reading the next section with coding and why we chose
+to do it this way.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{powerdot}
+
+\section*{Acknowledgements}
+The authors are grateful to Mael Hill\'ereau for contributing the
+\LyX\ layout file and description. Further, we like to thank all
+style contributors (see section~\ref{sec:styles}). Moreover, we wish
+to thank everyone who contributed to this package in any other
+way.\\[1em]
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
+Ramon van den Akker, Pavel \v C\'i\v zek, Darren Dale, Hans Marius
+Eikseth, Morten H\o gholm, Andr\'as Horv\'ath, Laurent Jacques, Akira
+Kakuto, Uwe Kern, Kyanh, Theo Stewart, Don P. Story and Herbert Vo\ss.
+\end{minipage}
+\hspace*{\stretch{1}}\\[1em]
+We hope not to have forgotten anyone.
+
+\PrintChangesX\PrintIndexX
+
+\end{document}
+